JP2008110068A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To block a fall of interests by making the specified area look impressed to easily receive game balls in a mechanical lottery processing. <P>SOLUTION: When game balls are received into a special pattern starter slot 82, an internal lottery processing is carried out and when the specified winning is earned as the result of the lottery processing, an open/close device is shifted to the open position from the closed position to make it ready for receiving the game balls. The game balls received into the open/close device are supplied to a rotary type accessary with a guide device to be received into either a special opening part or the normal opening part formed on the periphery of the rotary type accessary. Upon the reception of the game balls into the special opening part, a special game is executed. A thin-walled body is extended to the special area from the rim part on the side opposite to the direction of rotating the accessary at a special selection port to the direction of rotating the accessary so as to cover a part of the special selection port as that it serves as the normal surrounding wall to receive the game balls into the normal selection port adjacent to it in the direction opposite to the direction of rotating the accessary. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2008,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  Conventionally, a game machine such as a so-called “first type” pachinko machine has been subjected to an internal lottery process (lottery process by software) triggered by winning at the start opening. Is displayed on the effect image display device provided at the center of the screen. It is known that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is performed when the effect image display device displays that the internal lottery process has been won. On the other hand, for example, there is a gaming machine in which a mechanical lottery process using an accessory having a physical structure is performed. In such a gaming machine, a specific area referred to as a so-called “V zone” is formed in an accessory, and it is known that a big hit game is generated when a game ball wins a prize in this V zone ( For example, see Patent Document 1).

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine where a mechanical lottery process using an accessory is performed, if excessive special games occur, the player's gambling will be unnecessarily detrimental and the soundness of the game will be impaired, and in the hall There is a risk of causing great damage. Therefore, in order to suppress the occurrence of excessive winning in the mechanical lottery process, the proportion of the specific area called “V zone” in the accessory is reduced.

JP 2002-346082 A

  However, when the proportion of the specific area in the bonus item is small as in the conventional gaming machine, it may be difficult to win in the mechanical lottery process. As a result, there is a problem that the player loses an interest in the mechanical lottery process because the player loses the expectation of winning in the mechanical lottery process just by looking at the object.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to increase a player's expectation and interest in a mechanical lottery process and suppress a decrease in interest.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention for solving the above problems includes a gaming board having a gaming area, a receiving port provided in the gaming area and capable of receiving a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and the gaming area. An opening / closing device that is provided and displaceable between a closed mode in which a game ball cannot be received and an open mode in which a game ball can be received, and at least one special area and one or more normal areas are provided at the periphery A rotating hand that rotates in the circumferential direction, a guide device that can supply the rotating ball to the rotating hand, and the passing of the gaming ball to the receiving port or An entrance detection means for detecting acceptance, a lottery means for performing an internal lottery process based on detection by the entrance detection means that a game ball has passed or received at the entrance, and the lottery An opening / closing control means for displacing the opening / closing device from the closing mode to the opening mode when the result of the lottery process by the stage is a specific winning; Guidance control means for controlling the operation of the guide device so as to be supplied to an article, and a lottery determination means for determining whether or not a prize lottery that is a mechanical lottery using the rotary accessory is won And a game control means having at least a special game execution means for performing a special game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the winning selection is determined by the accessory lottery determination means. Then, the guide device causes only one game ball out of the game balls received from the opening / closing device to face the periphery of the rotary accessory, thereby allowing the single game ball to move to the rotary accessory. And the normal area is formed from a normal selection port capable of receiving a game ball, and a normal peripheral wall adjacent to the normal selection port and facing the guide device prior to the normal selection port, and The special area is formed of a special selection port capable of receiving a game ball, and a special peripheral wall adjacent to the special selection port and facing the special selection port prior to the special selection port. Is based on the fact that the game ball has been received at the special selection port, and determines that the winning combination lottery has been won, and the special area has a rotation of the rotary type combination at the special selection port. A thin wall body is extended from the edge opposite to the direction toward the rotation direction so as to cover a part of the special selection port, and the wall body is rotated by the rotary accessory. Before adjoining in the opposite direction The normal peripheral wall for allowing the normal selection port to accept a game ball is formed.

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, a gaming board having a gaming area, a receiving port through which a gaming ball can pass or receive, an opening / closing device that can be displaced between a closing mode and an opening mode, and a predetermined role A rotary combination for performing a lottery, a guide device capable of supplying game balls received from the opening / closing device to the rotary combination, and a game control means for controlling the game are provided.

  The game control means includes an entrance detection means, a lottery means, an opening / closing control means, a guidance control means, an accessory lottery determination means, and a special game execution means. When it is detected that the game ball has passed or received at the reception port by the reception port detection unit, an internal lottery process is performed by the lottery unit. If the result of the lottery process is a specific winning, the opening / closing control means displaces the opening / closing device from the closed mode to the open mode, and the gaming device can accept the game ball. The game balls received by the opening / closing device are supplied from the guide device to the rotary accessory by the guide control means. As a result, if it is determined that the winning item lottery is won by the winning item lottery determining unit, a special game advantageous to the player is performed by the special game executing unit.

  The guide device supplies the game ball to the rotary combination by causing only one game ball of the game balls received from the opening / closing device to face the periphery of the rotary combination. The normal region is formed by a normal selection port that can receive a game ball and a normal peripheral wall that cannot receive a game ball, and the guide device faces the normal peripheral wall prior to the normal selection port. The special area is formed by a special selection port that can receive the game ball and a special peripheral wall that cannot receive the game ball, and the guide device faces the special peripheral wall prior to the special selection port. When a game ball is received in this special selection port, it is determined that the winning lottery is won by the winning lottery determining means.

  Here, the special selection port has a thin wall body so as to cover the special selection port from the edge of the special selection port opposite to the rotation direction of the rotary accessory in the rotation direction. Is extended. And this wall body makes | forms the normal surrounding wall for making a normal selection port adjacent in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of a rotary type | formula accept a game ball. This can reduce the probability that a game ball will be received in the special selection port and increase the probability that the game ball will be received in the normal selection port in the lottery.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to give an impression that a game ball is easily accepted in a specific area in a mechanical lottery process, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

[Overall configuration of pachinko machine]
This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened on one side of an outer frame of a pachinko machine and a front frame is opened on one side of the main body frame. Note that FIG. 1 shows a view in which the decorative member in the game area is omitted.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, a front frame 4, a game board 5, and the like. The outer frame 2 is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame shape by upper, lower, left, and right wooden frame members, and has a lower receiving plate 6 that receives the lower surface of the main body frame 3 at the front lower portion of the outer frame 2. On one side of the front surface of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 is attached by a hinge mechanism 7 so as to be opened and closed forward. The outer frame 2 may be formed of a light metal such as resin or aluminum.

[About the frame structure]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the entire front side of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing the main body frame and the game board of the pachinko machine separated from the diagonally upper right front.

  The main body frame 3 is configured by integrally molding the front frame body 11, the game board mounting frame 12, and the mechanism mounting body 13 with a synthetic resin material. The front frame body 11 of the main body frame 3 is formed in a rectangular frame shape having a size corresponding to the outer shape excluding the support plate 6 on the front side of the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 1). A main body frame side hinge device 15 is fixed to the upper and lower portions on one side of the front frame body 11, and a hinge pin and a hinge with respect to the outer frame side hinge device 14 fixed to the upper and lower portions on one side of the outer frame 2. It is mounted so that it can be opened and closed by a hole. That is, the hinge mechanism 7 is comprised by the outer frame side hinge tool 14, the main body frame side hinge tool 15, the hinge pin, and the hinge hole.

  On the front side of the front frame body 11, a speaker box portion 16 is integrally formed in the front lower left area of the front frame body 11 positioned below the game board mounting frame 12, and is formed in the front opening portion of the speaker box portion 16. The speaker mounting plate 17 is mounted so as to close the opening. A speaker 18 is mounted on the speaker mounting plate 17. In addition, in the lower region of the front surface of the front frame 11, a firing rail 19 is attached to the upper half of the front frame 11 in an inclined manner. A lower front plate 30 is mounted on the lower half of the lower area of the front surface of the front frame 11. A lower tray 31 capable of storing game balls is provided at a substantially central portion of the front surface of the lower front plate 30, an operation handle 32 is provided on the right side, and an ashtray 33 is provided on the left side. . The lower plate 31 is provided with a ball discharge lever 34 for discharging the game ball downward.

[About front frame configuration]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. The front frame 4 is mounted on one side of the front surface of the front frame body 11 so as to cover a portion extending from the upper end of the front frame body 11 to the upper edge of the lower front plate 30 so as to be opened and closed forward by a hinge mechanism 36. Yes. In addition, a substantially circular opening window 38 through which the game area 37 of the game board 5 can be seen through from the front is formed at a substantially central portion of the front frame 4. Further, a window frame 39 having a rectangular frame shape larger than the opening window 38 is provided on the rear side of the front frame 4, and a transparent plate 50 such as a glass plate or a transparent resin plate is mounted on the window frame 39. . Further, substantially the entire front surface of the front frame 4 is decorated by a front decoration member in which a lamp or the like is provided, and an upper plate 51 is formed at the lower part of the front surface of the front frame 4. Specifically, around the opening window 38, a side decoration device 52 is mounted on the left and right sides, an upper plate 51 is mounted on the lower portion, and an acoustic decoration device 53 is mounted on the upper portion. The side decoration device 52 is mainly configured by a side decoration body 54 in which a lamp substrate is disposed and formed of a synthetic resin material. A plurality of slit-like opening holes that are long in the horizontal direction are arranged in the side decoration body 54 in the vertical direction, and a lens 55 corresponding to a light source disposed on the lamp substrate is incorporated in the opening hole. The acoustic illumination device 53 includes a transparent cover body 56, a speaker 57, a speaker cover 58, a reflector body (not shown), and the like, and these constituent members are assembled together to form a unit.

[Configuration of locking device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. A function of locking the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and a function of locking the front frame 4 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the rear side of the free end side opposite to the hinge mechanism 36 of the front frame body 11 The locking device 70 having both of the above is mounted. That is, in this embodiment, the locking device 70 includes a plurality of upper and lower body frame locking hooks 72 that detachably engage with a closing tool 71 provided on the outer frame 2 to lock the body frame 3 in a closed state, From the front of the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of upper and lower door locking hooks 74 that detachably engage with a closing tool 73 provided on the rear side of the front end of the front frame 4 to lock the front frame 4 in a closed state. And a cylinder lock 75 that is exposed through the front frame 11 and the lower front plate 30 so that the key can be inserted and unlocked. Then, a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 75 and rotated in one direction, so that the engagement between the main body frame locking hook 72 and the closing tool 71 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is unlocked. By rotating in the opposite direction, the engagement between the door locking hook 74 and the closing tool 73 of the front frame 4 is released and the front frame 4 is unlocked.

[Configuration of game board mounting frame and game board]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 1, 3, 4, 5, and 11. 3 is an enlarged front view showing the configuration of the game area, FIG. 5 is a rear view showing the entire rear side of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the game area from the diagonally upper right front.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, the game board mounting frame 12 of the main body frame 3 is provided on the rear side of the front frame body 11, and the game board 5 is mounted so as to be attachable / detachable from the front. . The game board 5 is composed of a game board 5a in a substantially square plate shape having a size to be fitted from the front of the game board mounting frame 12. A guide rail 78 including an outer rail 76 and an inner rail 77 is provided on the board surface (front surface) of the game board 5 (game board 5 a), and a game area 37 is defined inside the guide rail 78. . A predetermined gap is provided between the launch rail 19 and the guide rail 78, and when the launched game ball returns to the guide rail 78, the game ball is discharged from the gap. It is configured to be guided by the lower plate 31. Further, a front structural member 79 made of synthetic resin is mounted on the front surface of the game board 5 (game board 5a) in the outer region of the guide rail 78. Further, a center role 91 to be described later is attached to a substantially central portion of the game board 5 (game board 5a), and an opening 124 is formed so that the effect display device 115 located behind the game board 5a can be seen. An opening (not shown) is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 11, in the game area 37, a number of obstacle nails (not shown) are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill (not shown) is disposed at an appropriate position in the middle thereof. Is provided. A center accessory 91 is disposed at a substantially central position of the game area 37. The design of the center accessory 91 characterizes the model of the pachinko machine 1, the game concept, and the like. Details of the center accessory 91 will be described later.

  In addition, an effect display device 115 for effect display of the lottery result is provided behind the center accessory 91. As the effect display device 115, an appropriate display device capable of displaying image information obtained by combining decorative symbol image information, background image information, character image information, and the like is used. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the effect display device 115.

  On the other hand, a normal symbol start port 96 is arranged below the center role 91 in the game area 37. When a game ball enters the normal symbol start port 96, a normal lottery is performed and the normal symbol is changed. It is supposed to be displayed. Further, on the left side of the center role 91, there is a normal electric role 81 that is opened for a short time when it is won in the normal lottery, and a special symbol start port 82 that allows a game ball to be won by this opening. It is arranged. When a game ball wins the special symbol starting port 82, a big hit lottery is performed and the special symbol is changed.

  Further, in the game area 37, an attacker device 98 is disposed at a position further below the normal symbol starting port 96. The attacker device 98 moves the opening / closing member 99 forward and backward with the lower end portion of the opening / closing member 99 as an axis. By opening and closing in the direction, the lower large winning opening 83 is opened and closed. Further, a ball out port 90 through which game balls flowing down the game area 37 are discharged is provided below the lower side big winning port 83. Details of the normal symbol starting port 96, the ordinary electric accessory 81, the special symbol starting port 82, the attacker device 98, and the like will be described later.

  Further, at the lower left corner of the center accessory 91, there are three LEDs 84 functioning as a normal symbol display 333 (details will be described later), and four LEDs 85 functioning as a normal holding ball lamp 323 indicating a normal lottery holding state. One LED 87 functioning as a special holding ball lamp 322 indicating a special lottery holding state is provided. Is provided. In the normal holding ball lamp 323, the LED 85 is turned on only for the number of holding times (up to 4 times) in the normal lottery, and the special holding ball lamp 322 is set in the LED 87 for the number of holding times (up to once) in the special lottery. It comes to light up. In addition, four LEDs 86 functioning as a special symbol display 332 (details will be described later) for displaying a lottery result in the big hit lottery are provided on the upper left of the center accessory 91. For example, when the start winning prize is triggered, the four LEDs 86 are blinked in various patterns to display the variation state of the special symbol. Then, when a certain fluctuation time is over, the determined special symbols are displayed in a stopped state by the turn-on / off display patterns of the four LEDs 86. That is, the lottery result information is notified by turning on / off the LED 86. The special symbol variation display and stop display control by turning on / off the LED 86 is performed by the main control board 765 (see FIG. 36).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5, at the lower rear side of the game board 5, as a collective bag for receiving the game balls flowing into various winning devices and guiding the game balls to a predetermined position in a portion extending from the center portion to the lower portion. A box mounting base 118 having both the above function and the function as a box mounting portion is provided. A sub-control board box 130 in which the sub-integrated board 763 is housed is mounted on the box mounting base 118, and the main control board 765 in which the main control board 765 is housed is stacked on the rear side of the sub-control board box 130. A control board box 132 is mounted. Further, in a state where the box mounting base 118, the sub control board box 130 and the main control board box 132 are respectively mounted on the rear side of the game board 5, the game board 5 is moved from the front of the game board mounting frame 12 of the main body frame 3. The box mounting base 118, the sub control board box 130, and the main control board box 132 are arranged so as not to protrude outward from the outline of the game board 5 so as to be fitted and installed.

[About the position, size, and range of the game area and image display area]
A description will be given with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the front frame 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front frame 4 occupies at least two-thirds or more of the main body frame 3 in a front view. Then, the game area 37 having substantially the same circular shape and size as the transparent plate 50 can be visually recognized through the transparent plate 50 formed at the approximate center of the front frame 4. In addition, by arranging the outer rail 76 so as to form a substantially inscribed circle with respect to the square game board 5a of the game board 5, a game having a circular shape that is as wide as possible with respect to the square game board 5a. The area 37 is secured, and here the game area 37 has an area of at least three-fourths or more of the game board 5a.

  Further, the effect display device 115 provided at the rear of the game board 5 and located substantially in the center of the game area 37 in a front view has a horizontally-long rectangular image display area (an image display area 1150 described later). The image display area is visible through an opening 124 formed in the game board 5. This effect display device 115 is implemented as a large-sized liquid crystal display having a wider image display area in order to perform effects using various images and designs. Specifically, the width of the image display area of the effect display device 115 is approximately two-thirds the width of the game board 5, and the height of the image display area of the effect display device 115 is It has a size that is approximately one half of the vertical width of the game board 5. Since the image display area of the effect display device 115 has an area that is at least one third of the game area 37, the image display area of the effect display device 115 occupies a large proportion of the game area 37. It is an area.

  On the other hand, on the rear side of the game board 5, a rotary sorter 294, which is a circular large accessory in front view, straddles the inside of the game area 37 and the outside of the game area 37 (details will be described later). ) Is arranged. The “inside of the game area” is an inner area defined by the outer rail 76 in front view, and more specifically, an area sandwiched between the opening 124 and the outer rail 76 in front view. . The “outside of the game area” is an outer area defined by the outer rail 76 in front view, and more specifically, an area in which the front component member 79 is formed in front view.

  The rotary distribution device 294 includes one corner (here, the upper right corner) of the image display area of the effect display device 115, a part of the long side forming the corner, and the corner. It arrange | positions so that a part may overlap with the production | presentation display apparatus 115 so that the area | region containing 1/2 or more of the short side which forms a part may be concealed. Specifically, the rotary sorter 294 overlaps with a part of the image display area so as to hide approximately 15% of the image display area of the effect display device 115 in a front view, and to the right of the opening 124. It is arranged along the part. Further, a guide passage 340 described later overlaps with the image display area so that a bonus action using a game ball described later is executed in a portion overlapping the image display area of the rotary sorter 294. Is arranged. As described above, a part of the rotary sorting device 294 is arranged so as to overlap with the effect display device 115, and a part of the rotary sorting device 294 is arranged outside the game area 37. Can be appropriately attached to the game board 5. Furthermore, a portion (a viewable area 294a described later) in which an accessory action using a game ball by the rotary sorter 294 is executed is arranged inside the game area 37, so that a role by the rotary sorter 294 is used. The visibility of the object movement can be ensured and the original role can be executed.

  The game balls guided by the inner rail 77 and driven into the game area 37 are discharged from the ball out port 90 after flowing down the game area 37 along the left side of the opening 124. That is, in the game area 37, nails, windmills, and the like are provided along a specific area (the left side of the opening 124) where the game ball flows down, and a special symbol start port 96 described later is also provided. Yes. In the specific area where the game ball flows down, the rotary sorter 294 is not provided. Therefore, the rotary sorter 294 does not hinder the flow of the game ball, and the rotary sorter 294 is not disturbed. Even if the distribution device 294 is increased in size, the game can proceed smoothly.

  With such a configuration, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, most of the game area 37 (1/2 or more) is composed of the viewable area of the rotary sorter 294 and the image display area of the effect display device 115. Will occupy. Therefore, in addition to enabling a more varied and impactful game effect using the rotary distribution device 294 and the effect display device 115, the rotary distribution device 294 and the effect display device 115 are connected to the game board 5 (game board). 5a) can be appropriately arranged, and does not hinder the flow of the game ball in the game area 37 (in other words, the progress of the game).

[Configuration of body frame mechanism mounting body, ball tank and tank rail]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing the state in which various members are assembled to the main body frame of the pachinko machine from diagonally upper right rear, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view showing the main body frame from diagonally upper right rear.

  The mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3 is formed with a tank mounting portion 133, a rail mounting portion 134, a dispensing device mounting portion 135, and the like, and a ball tank 136 is mounted on the tank mounting portion 133. The ball tank 136 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and is formed in a box shape opening upward so that a large number of game balls supplied from the island facility can be stored. The storage state of the game balls in the ball tank 136 is visible through the rear side wall of the ball tank 136. In addition, a discharge port 138 for discharging a game ball is formed at the rear corner of the bottom plate portion 137 of the ball tank 136, and the bottom plate portion 137 is formed on an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the discharge port 138. .

  The mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3 is integrally formed with a rail mounting portion 134 so as to approach the tank mounting portion 133 downward, and the rail component 139 is mounted on the rail mounting portion 134 so that the tank rail 150 is configured. That is, in this embodiment, the rail mounting portion 134 is formed in a state in which the upper lateral portion of the main body frame 3 is recessed by a predetermined depth, and the back side wall of the recess is used as the front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150. An inclined rail shelf 155 is formed along the lower edge of the concave portion so as to incline downward from one end (left end toward FIG. 9) to the other end (right end toward FIG. 9). An upward surface extending in the lateral direction of the rail shelf 155 is a rail receiving portion 158.

  The rail constituting member 139 that is mounted on the rail mounting portion 134 and constitutes the tank rail 150 includes a rear wall portion 152 that forms a rail passage between the rail mounting portion 134 and the front wall portion 151, and an inclined lower plate And a partition wall (both not shown) that project along the center in the front-rear direction of the upper surface of the lower plate part and divide the rail passage into front and rear rows (in this embodiment, front and rear rows). It is formed in preparation. The rail constituting member 139 is attached to the rail attaching portion 134 by an appropriate attachment means, thereby forming a tank rail 150 having a plurality of front and rear rows of rail passages. Then, after the game balls discharged from the discharge port 138 of the ball tank 136 (dropped by its own weight) are received at one end of the rail passages in the front and rear rows of the tank rail 150, the game balls are moved along the rail passage by their own weight. And rolling toward the other end of the rail passage. Further, in this embodiment, the rail component member 139 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material, whereby the flow state of the game balls in the rail passage is visually recognized through the rear wall portion 152 of the rail component member 139. It is possible.

  The front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150 (rail mounting portion 134) has a first space portion to avoid interference with the upper end portion of the rear portion of the equipment (for example, the center accessory 91) protruding rearward of the game board 5. It is provided in a separated state. In this embodiment, the rear end of the rail shelf 155 serving as the rear end portion of the main body frame 3 and the rear wall portion of the tank rail 150 are substantially flush with the rear side wall of the ball tank 136. In other words, the tank rail 150 is arranged behind the rear surface of the game board 5 so that the rear wall portion of the ball tank 136 is substantially flush with the rear wall portion of the ball tank 136. Thereby, a first space portion for avoiding interference with the rear portion of the center accessory 91 is provided between the rear side of the game board 5 and the front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150.

  Above the tank rail 150, a rectifying body 156 for aligning the game balls flowing in the rail passage without overlapping vertically is mounted on the upper portion thereof so as to be swingable about the shaft 157. The rectifier 156 is provided with a weight from the center to the bottom.

[Configuration of payout device mounting part and ball payout device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. A vertically long paying device mounting portion 135 corresponding to a ball paying device (ball paying unit) 170 described below is formed in the vertical direction of one side of the mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3. The dispensing device mounting portion 135 is formed in a concave shape having an opening on the rear side. In addition, an opening 173 through which a payout motor 172 (see FIG. 4) of the ball payout device 170 can project is formed at a predetermined position of a back wall portion (not shown) having a stepped shape of the payout device mounting portion 135. .

  In a state where the ball paying device 170 is mounted in the recess of the paying device mounting portion 135, a second space portion is provided between the game board 5 and the first space portion, which is at substantially the same level in the front-rear direction. . Thus, the rail passage and the ball passage are arranged at substantially the same level in the front-rear direction. Further, the rear end of the body frame 3, that is, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion of the dispensing device mounting portion 135, the rear end of the rail shelf 155, the rear surfaces of the ball tank 136, the tank rail 150, and the ball dispensing device 170 are substantially the same surface. ing.

  The ball payout device 170 has a vertically long box shape that is substantially the same size as the recess of the payout device mounting portion 135, and is unitized by mounting various parts related to payout. The ball payout device 170 is fitted from the rear opening of the concave portion of the payout device mounting portion 135 and is mounted by appropriate mounting means (for example, mounting means such as an elastic clip, a locking claw, and a screw). It has become.

  Although not shown, the ball dispensing device 170 is formed by dividing the ball passages having inflow ports respectively communicating with the outlets of the rail passages in the tank rail 150 into a plurality of front and rear rows (for example, front and rear rows). Also, the downstream portions of the front and rear rows of ball passages formed in the interior are bifurcated to form front and rear rows of prize balls, a ball rental ball passage and a ball removal ball passage. In addition, a payout member (not shown) made of a rotating body for distributing and paying out game balls to any of the passages is rotated in the forward and reverse directions at a branch portion between the winning ball and the ball passage for lending and the ball passage for ball removal. It is arranged to be possible.

[Equipment on the lower rear of the main frame]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. On the rear side of the front frame body 11 of the main body frame 3, one side (left side in FIG. 5) of the rear lower region of the front frame body 11 located below the game board mounting frame 12 is below the launch rail 19. A launching device 194 that is unitized by assembling a launching hammer (not shown) for launching a game ball sent to the launching position of the tilted end, a launching motor 192 that operates the launching hammer, and the like onto the mounting substrate 193 is provided. It is installed. In addition, a power supply board box 196 that houses the power supply board 195 is mounted at a substantially central portion of the rear lower region of the front frame body 11, and the dispensing control board 775 is placed in a state of being superimposed on the rear side of the power supply board box 196. A payout control board box 198 is mounted. The payout control board 775 includes a RAM that stores the number of game balls to be paid out, and transmits a control signal for paying out game balls in accordance with a payout signal transmitted from the main control board 765 to a relay circuit board (not shown). Thus, the operation of the dispensing motor 172 is controlled.

[Configuration of rear cover body]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing the entire rear side of the pachinko machine from the upper right rear.

  The rear end portions of the display device control board box 117 (see FIG. 10) and the main control board box 132 arranged on the rear surface of the game board 5 protrude toward the window opening portion opened in the center portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. . And between the side wall part which comprises one side wall of the window opening part of the mechanism mounting body 13, and the one side wall of the dispensing device mounting part 135 which comprises the other side wall, a substantially square box shape is formed by an opaque synthetic resin material. The formed rear cover body 210 is detachably mounted by a cover hinge mechanism 211.

  The rear cover body 210 is configured integrally with a substantially rectangular rear wall portion 212 and a peripheral wall portion 213 that protrudes forward from the outer peripheral edge of the rear wall portion 212. Of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, the wall portion 213 a on one side is attached and detached from above the hinge holes of the hinge body 214 formed at a total of three locations above and below the side wall portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. A hinge body 216 having a hinge pin 215 that can be fitted downward is integrally formed. Further, of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, the other wall portion 213b has a locking claw that can be elastically engaged with a locking hole formed in one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 135. An elastic closing body 217 is integrally formed.

  That is, in the rear cover body 210, the hinge pins 215 of the upper and lower and intermediate hinge bodies 216 are respectively fitted from above the hinge holes of the hinge body 214 of the side wall portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. In this state, the rear cover body 210 is rotated toward the other side of the mechanism mounting body 13 around the hinge pin 215, and the elastic closing body 217 is inserted into the locking hole on one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 135. The rear cover body 210 is held in the closed state on the rear side of the mechanism mounting body 13 by being elastically engaged. Then, the rear cover body 210 covers the entire display device control board box 117 (see FIG. 11) on the rear surface of the game board 5 and a portion extending from the substantially middle portion to the upper end of the main control board box 132 by the rear cover body 210. ing. As a result, the board connector of the main control board 765 exposed to the upper part of the main control board box 132 (mainly a board connector for connecting to the liquid crystal control board 758) is hidden from view behind.

  Further, a portion from the substantially middle portion to the lower end of the main control board box 132 is exposed without being covered by the rear cover body 210. The inspection connector 218 disposed on the main control board 765 is exposed below the main control board box 132, and the inspection connector 218 on the main control board 765 is closed with the rear cover body 210 closed. A board inspection device (not shown) can be connected to the connector 218 for inspection.

  A large number of heat radiation holes 230, 231, 232, and 233 are provided in the rear cover body 210, and internal heat is released from these many heat radiation holes 230, 231, 232, and 233. . In this embodiment, the rear cover body 210 is provided with a large number of slit-like heat radiation holes 230 extending from the peripheral wall portion 213 to the rear wall portion 212, and from the substantially middle height position of the rear wall portion 212 to the upper portion. A large number of elliptical, elliptical, etc. heat radiation holes 231 are provided therethrough, and a large number of elliptical, elliptical, etc. heat radiation holes 232 and a predetermined number of horizontally elongated rectangular heat radiation holes 233 pass through the rear wall 212. It is installed.

  Further, the horizontally long rectangular heat radiation holes 233 have a size corresponding to the size and arrangement position of a plurality of parallel seal portions 235 sealed by the seal screws (sealing members) of the main control board box 132. It penetrates the position. As a result, even when the opaque rear cover body 210 is closed, the plurality of parallel sealing portions 235 of the main control board box 132 are exposed so as to be visible at the portion of the heat radiation hole 233. For this reason, even when the rear cover body 210 is closed, the sealing state of the sealing portion 235 of the main control board box 132 can be easily visually confirmed. Further, since the opaque synthetic resin material can be easily used as a synthetic resin material that is recycled compared to the transparent synthetic resin material, the rear cover body 210 can be manufactured at low cost.

  Of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, a predetermined position (two places on the left and right in this embodiment) of the upper wall portion 213c is substantially C-shaped to hold a power cord (not shown) in an appropriately folded state. An elastically deformable cord holder 237 extends toward the rear wall surface of the upper tank rail 150 (the rear wall surface of the rail component 139). A knob for removing the power cord by elastically deforming the cord holder 237 is formed at the tip of the cord holder 237.

  One end of the power cord is detachably connected to the board connector 239 of the distribution board 238, and the power plug at the other end is inserted into a power outlet. As described above, the cord holder 237 is integrally formed on the rear cover body 210 and the power cord is held, so that the power cord hangs and gets caught by foreign objects when the pachinko machine is transported and stored. Problems can be prevented.

[About the configuration of ball derivatives etc. for the lower pan of the rear lower part of the main body frame]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the rear cover and various control boards are removed from the perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

  A lower dish ball derivative 253 is attached to the other side portion (hinge portion) of the rear lower region of the main body frame 3 in the recessed portion of the rear step portion of the speaker box portion 16. This lower tray ball derivative 253 is used when the game balls paid out to the upper plate 51 through the upper plate connecting path (not shown) from the award and rental ball passages of the ball dispensing device 170 are full. The game ball on the upper plate communication path is for guiding the game ball to the lower plate 31.

  In this embodiment, a board box 254 that houses the interface board 252 is mounted on the outer surface of the rear wall of the lower plate ball derivative 253. The interface board 252 is interposed between the ball lending machine installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 775, and transmits / receives a signal related to ball lending between the ball lending machine and the payout control board 775. Electrical connection is possible.

[Concerning the specific composition of the Center character]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 is a front view showing the center accessory, FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view showing a state where the front unit and the rear unit of the center accessory are separated, and FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the front unit separated in functional units. 15 is an exploded perspective view showing a state, FIG. 15 is a perspective view showing the front unit from obliquely upper left front, FIG. 16 is a perspective view showing the front unit obliquely from upper right rear, and FIG. 17 is a functional unit of the rear unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state isolate | separated by.

  As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the center accessory 91 has a frame-like appearance, and is arranged in the center of the game area 37, and the outer peripheral portion extending from the upper side to the right side of the game area 37. It extends to the right edge. In other words, the substantial game area 37 is not formed on the right side of the center accessory 91 so that the game ball does not pass therethrough. Although the size of the center accessory 91 is not particularly limited, in this example, it is constructed as an extremely large accessory that occupies about 2/3 of the entire game area 37.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 to 17, the center accessory 91 is roughly divided into a front unit 120 arranged on the front side and a rear unit 121 arranged on the rear side. The front unit 120 and the rear unit 121 are joined by sandwiching the game board 5 from the front and rear. The front unit 120 is disposed in a state of protruding forward from the game area 37 and includes a decorative frame 125 that partitions the game area 37 and the internal space. A guide wall 123 for guiding the game ball is formed on the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the decorative frame 125, and an opening 124 functioning as a display window is provided in the center of the decorative frame 125. It has been.

  The decoration frame 125 has a decoration on the surface, and an electric decoration body 129 including a plurality of light emitting means is provided on the right side. Further, in the decorative frame 125, the upper right portion protrudes upward from the upper left portion, and an expansion opening 140 is formed inside thereof. The expansion opening 140 functions as a space for accommodating a rotary sorting device 294 described later, and is formed in a state of communicating with the opening 124. The guide wall 123 on the left side wall of the expansion opening 140 is provided with a large winning opening 141 through which the game ball can be won, penetrating the peripheral surface of the decoration frame 125 and can be opened and closed by the movable piece 142. . In the drawing, the state where the big winning opening 141 is closed by the movable piece 142 is shown, and in this state, the gaming balls cannot be won in the big winning opening 141. The game ball that has opened the movable piece 142 and won a prize winning opening 141 is guided by a guide passage 340 made of a transparent resin member, and is sent to a rotary sorter 294 described later.

  Further, a warp inlet 63 (see FIG. 15) through which a game ball can enter is provided on the left side surface of the decoration frame 125, and the game ball entered from the warp inlet 63 is placed inside the decoration frame 125. It is possible to incorporate. On the inner bottom surface of the decorative frame 125, there is provided an outflow portion 62 for guiding a game ball flowing out from the stage 20 described later to the vicinity of the normal symbol starting port 96. A plurality of light emitting decorative bodies 61 simulating a light projector are arranged inside the decorative frame 125.

  Hereinafter, each of the above-described components assembled to the decorative frame 125 will be described in more detail.

[About the movable piece and its drive mechanism]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 13, 14, 15, 18, and 19. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the opening / closing mechanism of the movable piece, and FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view showing the state in which the components of the opening / closing member drive mechanism are separated from the upper left rear.

  The movable piece 142 that opens and closes the prize winning opening 141 is located on the front upper side of the prize winning opening unit 146 and is slidably sandwiched by the upper lid 143 and the middle frame 145, and is moved back and forth by the prize winning opening opening / closing driving means 160 described later. Can be slid. In addition, the rear unit 121 of the center accessory 91 is provided with a special prize opening attachment base 296 that is a box body for accommodating and fixing the special prize opening opening / closing drive means 160 therein. In the front unit 120 of 91, a large winning opening attaching window 302 is formed, which is a window portion that allows the large winning opening opening / closing driving means 160 disposed on the large winning opening attaching base 296 to be visually recognized from the front side.

  The movable piece 142 rotates the link arm 163 about the link shaft 164 as a rotation axis by the movement of the plunger 162 of the solenoid 161. The link arm 163 slides the movable piece 142 back and forth by a link mechanism. In this manner, the reciprocating motion of the plunger 162 is converted into the reciprocating motion of the movable piece 142, and can be displaced from the protruding state (closed state) to the retracted state (open state). Note that the plunger 162 is lowered when not energized, and the movable piece 142 is kept in a protruding state via the link arm 163.

  In the special prize opening / closing driving means 160, the solenoid 161 is sandwiched in the vertical direction by the middle frame 145 and the receiving part 144, and the link shaft 164 is fitted in the receiving part 144 to be received in the special prize opening unit 146. Established. A solenoid support portion 148 is joined to the rear side of the solenoid 161, and serves as a guide for fixing the special prize opening unit 146. The big prize opening unit 146 is inserted and fixed to the big prize opening attachment window 302 and the big prize opening attachment base 296 so that the movable piece 142 and the big prize opening 141 are exposed forward. In addition, a game ball detecting means 147 (winning hole sensor 330) is provided in the middle of a game ball that has won a prize winning opening 141 flowing into the guide passage 340, and the game ball detecting means 147 provides a game to the winning prize opening 141. It is detected that the ball has won.

[Stage and compound rolling distribution device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 14, 15, 16, 20, 21, and 22. FIG. 20 is a plan view showing the composite rolling distribution device, FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of the composite rolling distribution device, and FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the under-stage illumination. .

  A stage 20 capable of rolling the game ball on the upper surface is provided at the center lower portion (that is, the inner bottom surface) of the front unit 120. A compound rolling distribution device 21 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 41 (see FIG. 21) is formed at the center of the stage 20, and a stage left margin 42 and a right canopy 43 are formed at the outer edge thereof. . An approach path 45 (see FIG. 16) connected to the outer edge portion of the composite rolling distribution device 21 is formed at the left rear side of the stage 20. The upstream end of the approach path 45 is connected to a warp outlet 44, and the warp outlet 44 communicates with a warp inlet 63 that opens toward the game area 37 through a warp passage 60. A partition plate 40 is erected on the player side of the stage 20, and an outflow portion 62 including a specific outflow channel 26 and a normal outflow channel 27 is formed below the partition plate 40.

  The entire stage 20 is integrally formed of a light-transmitting plastic, and an under-stage electric decoration 100 (see FIG. 22) is disposed on the entire surface below the stage 20. A light projecting decorative body 61 is disposed below the right canopy 43 and is visible through the right canopy 43. The floodlight decorative body 61 will be described later.

  The complex rolling distribution device 21 is formed with a concave second rolling region 23 in which one specific outlet 24 and two normal outlets 25 are formed at the center, and an outer edge thereof. A first rolling region 22 is formed which is in an oval shape in plan view and has a slope that is higher at the outer edge than the inner edge. A step portion 28 is formed at the boundary between the first rolling region 22 and the second rolling region 23, and the first rolling region 22 is slightly higher than the second rolling region 23 in a step shape. Yes. The specific outlet 24 is connected to a specific outflow path 26 of the outflow portion 62 formed at the front and lower side of the stage 20, and the normal outlet 25 is connected to the normal outflow path 27, and game balls that have entered the specific outlet 24 and the normal outlet 25 are received. The normal game start port 96 is allowed to flow out into the game area 37 (see FIG. 3).

  The game ball that has entered the warp inlet 63 passes through the curved warp passage 60 and descends onto the stage 20 from the warp outlet 44. The game ball that has gained speed by descending the warp passage 60 rolls on the approach path 45 and enters the first rolling region 22 of the composite rolling sorting device 21. The game ball proceeds in a direction crossing from the left to the right on the first rolling area 22 according to the orientation of the approach path 45, and gradually turns clockwise in accordance with the gradient of the first rolling area 22. The game ball turns around the second rolling area 23, travels a portion of the first rolling area 22 closer to the player than the second rolling area 23, and eventually the first rolling area 22 and the second rolling area 23 It flows into the second rolling region 23 beyond the step 28 formed at the boundary with the second rolling region 23.

  Unlike the first rolling region 22, the second rolling region 23 has a circular planar shape. A step portion 28 is formed at the boundary between the second rolling region 23 and the first rolling region 22, and the outer edge portion of the second rolling region 23 is lower than the inner edge portion of the first rolling region 22. ing. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the second rolling region 23 does not flow back to the first rolling region 22 beyond the step portion 28. When the game ball passes the stepped portion 28 and enters the second rolling region 23, the second rolling region 23 has a circular planar shape, so that the game ball is guided by the stepped portion 28 and the gaming ball is moved to the first rolling region 22. It turns with a trajectory that is harder than the upper trajectory. Eventually, the game ball approaches the central portion according to the gradient of the second rolling region 23 and is immersed in either the specific outlet 24 or the normal outlet 25.

  The game ball immersed in the specific outlet 24 flows down to the player side through the specific outlet 26 connected to the specific outlet 24, and at a position directly above the normal symbol starting port 96 from the center of the outlet 62. It flows out to the game area 37. On the other hand, the game ball immersed in the normal exit 25 flows down the normal outflow path 27 and flows out from the left or right opening of the outflow portion 62 to the game area 37. Since the opening part of the normal outflow path 27 is shifted from the center to the left and right, the game ball hardly enters the normal symbol starting port 96. On the other hand, when it flows out from the specific outflow path 26 to the game area 37, almost all enters the normal symbol starting port 96. In this way, the composite rolling distribution device 21 performs a function of distributing the winnings to the normal symbol starting port 96 and other results on the stage 20.

  The complex rolling distribution device 21 is a rolling distribution device having a size that occupies most of the lower center of the center accessory 91, and is planar compared to a conventional concave rolling distribution device. Since the game ball rolls in a wide area, it is an attractive feature for the player.

  Moreover, according to the composite rolling distribution apparatus 21, since the rolling surface is large, the possibility that the game balls come into contact with each other even when a plurality of game balls flow in is reduced. As a result, the trajectory of the game ball changes, and it flows out of the specific outlet 24 or the normal outlet 25 earlier than when it does not collide, or conversely stays on the rolling surface without easily flowing out. There is an effect to prevent.

  In addition, the composite rolling distribution device 21 has an entrance path 45 through which the first rolling area 22 extends in the outer extending portion of the second rolling area 23 and allows game balls to flow from the outer edge of the first rolling area 22. This is a two-dimensionally-structured object and does not impair the visibility of the effect display device 115 by creating a shielding part in front of the effect display device 115. It has a shape suitable as an accessory positioned below.

  The complex rolling distribution device 21 includes a first rolling region 22 and a second rolling region 23 which are rolling surfaces, a specific outlet 24 and a normal outlet 25, and is driven by a motor or the like. There are no movable members. Therefore, for example, there is no problem of aiming at a specific area due to intermittent games measured by the player, which is likely to be a problem in a power-driven distribution device. Further, since there is no movable member, there is an advantage that there is little risk of damage or wear due to use, and it is difficult to cause a failure.

[Partition plate]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. The partition plate 40 is a thin plate made of a light-transmitting plastic, has a substantially oval shape with a part cut away in a front view, and is located at the forefront below the center of the player-side opening 124 of the front unit 120. Established. The surface of the partition plate 40 is formed with irregularities that cause a slight change in thickness, and a double ellipse pattern is drawn. This brings about a design effect that suggests the shape of the combined rolling distribution device 21 and emphasizes the existence of the outflow portion 62.

  The partition plate 40 is erected at the forefront portion of the stage 20 on the player side, and prevents the game ball from flowing out from the front. If there is no partition plate 40 and the game ball flows out from the front of the stage 20, the game ball that has flowed in from the approach path 45 does not necessarily pass through the combined rolling distribution device 21, and the game area 37. May flow out from the opening 124 forward. Due to the presence of the partition plate 40, the game ball that has flowed into the stage 20 always flows out from the specific outlet 24 or the normal outlet 25 of the composite rolling distribution device 21, and the game ball is stably and at a predetermined probability. It can be made to enter the normal symbol starting port 96. This makes it possible for manufacturers to provide a gaming machine with a stable winning rate, which will stabilize the profits of the amusement store and allow players to tackle the game with peace of mind.

  Further, when the game ball flows into the combined rolling distribution device 21 vigorously, or when the game ball can flow into the stage 20 from a place other than the warp inlet 63, the game ball is caused by a bullet or the like. Although there is a possibility of flowing out from the opening 124 to the player side, since the partition plate 40 is sufficiently high in height, it is possible to prevent outflow from the front even when the game ball bounces.

  Conversely, a game ball that flows down the game area 37 and is bulleted by a nail or the like disposed on the game board 5 passes through the opening 124 and enters the center accessory 91. 40. The upper and left sides of the center accessory 91 are partitioned by a decorative frame 125, and the game balls flowing down the game area 37 do not enter the stage 20 except through the warp inlet 63. Further, below the center accessory 91, the partition plate 40 has a sufficient height even if the game ball jumps upward, and prevents the game ball from entering the center accessory 91. The kinetic energy obtained by the game ball flowing down the game area 37 is insufficient to jump over the partition plate 40 and enter the stage 20, and even when the game ball is shot by a nail or the like. Since there is no contact with other game balls on the stage 20, there is no possibility of affecting the distribution of the game balls in the composite rolling distribution device 21.

  Moreover, since the upper part of the opening part 124 is not covered with the partition plate 40, an operator can insert a hand or a tool at the time of maintenance or the like, and the workability is excellent. Moreover, since there are no movable parts, it is difficult to cause a failure.

  Moreover, although the partition plate 40 is erected on the player side from the stage 20, since it is formed of a translucent material, it impedes the visibility of the effect display device 115 and the like located in the back. There is nothing.

  Further, since the partition plate 40 is installed in the portion closest to the player side of the center actor 91, it is visually conspicuous, but the whole is a substantially elliptical plate shape and a part of the thickness is thin. Since it has an appearance that two large and small ellipses overlap, it has a design reminiscent of the relationship with the shape of the composite rolling distribution device 21. Moreover, the thin part of said partition plate 40 is formed in the location close | similar to the outflow part 62, and the effect which recalls the shape of the opening part of the outflow part 62 can also be anticipated. Thereby, it can prevent that the partition plate 40 becomes obstructive also in the forefront part of the center accessory 91 as a design structure.

[About the stage lighting]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. The stage 20 is made of a light-transmitting plastic, and the under-stage electrical decoration 100 disposed below the stage is visible through the stage 20. The understage electrical decoration 100 includes an LED substrate 104, a lens 101, and a reflector 102, and a circular notch 103 is formed at the center. Above the circular notch 103, the second rolling region 23 of the composite rolling distribution device 21 is located, and the specific outlet 24 and the normal outlet 27 connected to the specific outlet 24 and the normal outlet 25 are the circular notch 103. It penetrates through the gap.

  The lens 101 is formed of a light-transmitting plastic. On the other hand, the reflector 102 is formed of an opaque plastic, a large number of small rectangular holes are opened on the upper surface, and a glossy surface is formed on the upper surface. The lens 101 and the reflector 102 are combined, and a small hole of the reflector 102 has a light-transmitting window shape. The LED board 104 includes a large number of LEDs facing upward at positions corresponding to the small holes of the reflector 102, and the upper surface of the stage 20 is caused to emit light through a window-like portion of the lens 101 disposed above the LED board 104. Directing. The LED on the LED substrate 104 is transmitted upward through the window-shaped portion of the lens 101, but the transmitted light is diffused by the lens 101, reflected by the upper surface of the reflector 102, and passed through the stage 20 from below. Irradiate overall.

[About floodlight decoration]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. The floodlight decorative body 61 has an external appearance imitating a television camera. An LED is provided at the center of the light projecting decorative body 61, and is controlled by a sub-integrated board 763 (see FIG. 36) to emit light and visually produce the periphery of the stage 20. There are three light projecting decorative bodies 61 in total, one each arranged on the upper left side, the left side inside the opening 124 of the front unit 120, and below the right canopy 43.

[Schematic configuration of rear unit]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. The rear unit 121 includes a frame-shaped rear frame 292 having an opening 291 through which the effect display device 115 can be visually recognized, a grand prize opening unit 146 disposed on the upper left of the rear frame 292, and a rear frame 292. A rotary distribution device 294 that is arranged on the right side and that distributes the game balls guided from the prize winning port 141 by a rotating body, and a game ball that is arranged below the rear frame 292 and flows out of the rotary distribution device 294 A right discharge path unit 273 having a distribution device discharge path 274 formed therein for discharging and a left start port discharge path 272 for discharging game balls flowing out from the special start port unit 530 (see FIG. 29, etc.) The discharge path unit 271 is formed. Hereinafter, each component in the rear unit 121 will be described in detail.

[About rear frame]
This will be described with reference to FIG. The rear frame 292 is a substantially quadrangular frame-shaped member whose front surface is open, and includes a plate-like back plate 300 in which an opening 291 is formed, and a side plate 301 that extends forward from the periphery of the back plate 300. It consists of and. That is, each of the above-described components is formed in a box shape so as to be accommodated in the rear frame 292. Although not shown, a guide passage component for guiding a winning game ball or a discharged game ball to a predetermined portion is assembled around the rear frame 292, particularly on the left side and the lower right side. It is supposed to be.

[Rotating sorter]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23 is a perspective view showing the rotary sorting device from the upper left front, FIG. 24 is a front view showing the rotary sorting device, and FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the rotary sorting device with the rotating body and carry-in pieces removed. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the components of the rotary sorter are separated from the upper left front, and FIG. 27 is a state in which the components of the rotary sorter are separated. FIG. 28 is an explanatory view showing the internal configuration of the rotary sorter.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 28, the rotary sorter 294 has a rotating body 297 having a disk shape, and the rotating body 297 includes a plurality of regions (specific region 343, normal region 343). A region 344) is provided along the outer circumferential direction. Then, the game balls that have entered the special winning opening 141 and flowed down the guide passage 340 are divided into an advantageous state and an unfavorable state using the rotating body 297. The rotating body 297 rotates clockwise. The rotary sorter 294 has a concave specific area 343 and a normal area 344 as the plurality of areas, and a disk-shaped rotating body 297 that is rotatably supported, a rotating body driving means 405, and a rotating body. And a rotating body case 342 having an outer peripheral wall 346 surrounding the periphery of 297. The rotary sorter 294 is fixedly attached to the back of the game board 5a so that the surface of the rotating body 297 and the surface of the game board 5a are parallel to each other.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, an inlet 347 that is temporarily communicated with the specific area 343 or the normal area 344 as the rotating body 297 rotates is formed in the outer peripheral wall 346 of the rotating body case 342. . Further, on the rotating body receiving surface 349 that accommodates the rotating body 297 in the rotating body case 342, a specific outlet 360 that allows a game ball that has entered the specific area 343 to flow out of the specific area 343, and a game that has entered the normal area 344 A normal outlet 361 for allowing the sphere to flow out of the normal region 344 is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 28, a game ball detecting means 384 (V winning sensor 331) is provided in the middle of the first outflow path 387 through which the game ball flowing out from the specific outlet 360 flows down. When a game ball is detected by 384, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is generated. On the other hand, a game ball detection means 385 (discharge sensor 313) is provided in the middle of the second outflow path 388 through which the game balls flowing out from the normal outlet 361 flow down, and the game balls are detected by the game ball detection means 385. However, an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player does not occur.

  In this example, a jackpot mode is prepared as a mode in which a profit is given to the player. Specifically, a round operation for opening and closing the attacker device 98 in a fixed pattern is repeated up to 15 rounds for a maximum of 30 seconds, and such repetition of the round operation is referred to as “big hit game”. The player can obtain a lot of prize balls by winning the game balls in the lower big prize opening 83 during the big hit game. Note that each round operation ends when either 30 seconds elapses or 10 winning balls are counted. The big hit game ends after 15 rounds have been completed.

  The rotating body 297 is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft 364 having an axial center provided in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, and has a disk shape. At the periphery thereof, there are provided three specific regions 343 that are arranged at equal intervals and open in the radial direction, and fifteen normal regions 344 formed at equal intervals between the specific regions 343. ing. That is, the phase difference between the specific areas 343 is 120 °, and five normal areas 344 are arranged between the specific areas 343. Through holes that can discharge game balls are formed in the bottom surfaces of the respective regions 343 and 344, and the game balls flow out by a combination of the through holes and an outlet formed in the rotating body receiving surface 349. The state and the state where it is not discharged are switched. More specifically, the through hole in the specific area 343 is formed at a position that matches the specific outlet 360 formed in the rotor receiving surface 349 and does not match the normal outlet 361, while the through hole in the normal area 344 Is formed at a position that matches the normal outlet 361 formed on the rotating body receiving surface 349 and does not match the specific outlet 360. Here, “match” indicates a state where the game balls are communicated with each other at least to the extent that the game balls can be discharged, and “does not match” means that the communication portion is larger than the diameter of the game balls even if they overlap. A small game ball is not allowed to pass through. Therefore, when a game ball enters the specific area 343, the game ball rotates together with the rotating body 297, and flows out from the specific outlet 360 when the specific area 343 matches the specific outlet 360. When a game ball enters the normal area 344, the game ball rotates with the rotating body 297, and flows out from the normal outlet 361 when the normal area 344 matches the normal outlet 361. Note that a V winning sensor 331 (see FIG. 36) is disposed in the first outflow path 387 that communicates with the specific outlet 360 and flows down the game ball that has flowed out of the specific outlet 360. Is detected by the V winning sensor 331. In addition, a discharge sensor 313 (see FIG. 36) is disposed in the second outflow path 388 that communicates with the normal outlet 361 and flows down the game ball that has flowed out of the normal outlet 361. Is discharged by the discharge sensor 313.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24, if a threshold (area length of the specific area 343) from the normal area 344 immediately before the specific area 343 to the specific area 343 is R, from any one of the normal areas 344 The distance to the normal area 344 after the normal area 344 (the length of the normal area 344) is 1.8R. Further, the distance from the specific area 343 to the normal area 344 immediately after the specific area 343 (the area length of the normal area 344) is 1.8R.

  Here, the “normal area 344 immediately before the specific area 343” means the normal area 344 that is one area before the specific area 343 in the rotation direction of the rotary sorter 294. That is, the specific area 343 and the normal area 344 sequentially reach the inflow port 347 by the rotation of the rotary sorter 294, but the normal area 344 reaches the inflow port 347 one ahead of the specific area 343. Of the specific area 343 provided at the periphery of the rotator 297, the opening that can receive the game ball is the “special selection port” of the present invention, and the opening of the normal area 344 provided at the periphery of the rotator 297. Among them, the opening that can receive the game ball is the “normal selection port” of the present invention. Further, in the specific region 343, a wall portion interposed from the “special selection port” to the “normal selection port” (that is, the previous “normal selection port”) adjacent to the accessory rotation direction is the present invention. From the “normally selected port” of the normal region 344 to another “normally selected port” (that is, the previous “normally selected port”) adjacent to the accessory in the direction of rotation. The wall portion interposed between the two is the “normal peripheral wall” of the present invention.

  Further, “the interval from the normal area 344 immediately before the specific area 343 to the specific area 343” means “from the left end of the normal area 344 immediately before the specific area 343 to the left end of the specific area 343” Meaning “Kyori to the Department”. Similarly, “from one of the normal areas 344 to the normal area 344 immediately after the normal area 344” and “from the specific area 343 to the normal area 344 after the specific area 343” Respectively, “from the left end of the opening of any one of the normal areas 344 to the left end of the opening of the normal area 344 immediately after the normal area 344” and “the specific area from the left end of the opening of the specific area 343” This means “the distance to the left end of the opening of the normal region 344 one after 343”.

  Note that the opening length of the specific region 343 and the opening length of the normal region 344 are approximately the same size. In other words, the gap from the left end of the opening of any one of the normal areas 344 to the right end of the opening of the normal area 344 immediately after the normal area 344 is the opening of the normal area 344 immediately before the specific area 343. It is formed larger than the distance from the left end portion to the right end portion of the opening of the specific region 343. Similarly, the gap from the left end of the opening of the specific area 343 to the right end of the opening of the normal area 344 immediately after the specific area 343 is also determined from the left end of the normal area 344 immediately before the specific area 343. The area 343 is formed to be larger than the gap to the right end of the opening.

  Here, the “opening length of the specific area 343 (special selection port)” means the length in the rotation direction of the specific area 343 (special selection port) at the peripheral edge of the rotary sorter 294, and the “normal area” The “opening length of 344 (normal selection port)” means the length in the rotation direction of the normal region 344 (normal selection port) in the peripheral portion of the rotary sorter 294.

  By the way, even if the game ball that has flowed down the guide passage 340 reaches the inflow port 347, the inflow port 347 communicates with the specific region 343 (special selection port) or the normal region 344 (normal selection port) in the rotating body 297. Stays at that location, and when the inflow port 347 and one of the regions (selection ports) 343 and 344 face each other as the rotating body 297 rotates, the specific region 343 (special selection port) or the normal region 344 Enter (normally selected). As a result, by making the rotational speed of the rotary sorter 294 constant, the probability of entering the specific area 343 (special selection port) on the accessory is theoretically 1/10 (on the accessory The probability of entering the normal actor driving mechanism 334 is 9/10). Therefore, although the probability of entering the specific area 343 (special selection port) is actually 1/10, it is 1/6 at a glance (hereinafter referred to as “the apparent probability of entering the specific area 343”). Visual effect, and in turn, the effect of promoting the player's willingness to play. Then, game balls that have entered the specific area 343 (special selection port) flow out of the specific outlet 360, and game media that have entered the normal area 344 (normal selection port) flow out of the normal outlet 361. In addition, based on the fact that the game ball has flowed out of the specific area 343, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player occurs.

  On the other hand, the opening area width (opening width) of the specific area 343 is formed larger than the opening area width (opening width) of the normal area 344. More specifically, a wall 3431 that closes a part of the opening of the specific region 343 is formed at the peripheral edge of the rotary sorter 294. By this wall 3431, the boundary from the left end of the opening of the specific area 343 to the right end of the opening of the normal area 344 immediately after the specific area 343 is changed from the left end of the opening of any one of the normal areas 344 to the normal area 344. The size is almost the same as the size up to the right end of the opening of the normal region 344 after the first. Further, the normal region 344 is formed so that the opening length and the opening region width are substantially the same size. That is, the wall 3431 not only narrows the “special selection port”, but also places the game ball in the “normal selection port” (that is, the “normal selection port” one after) adjacent to the direction opposite to the direction of the accessory rotation. It functions as a “normal wall” for acceptance.

  Here, the “opening region width (opening width)” means the length in the rotation direction on the rotation center side (diameter inside) with respect to the peripheral portion of the rotary sorter 294.

  Thus, although the opening length of the specific region 343 (special selection port) and the opening length of the normal region 344 (normal selection port) are almost the same size, the opening region width of the specific region 343 is the normal region 344. Since it is larger than the opening area width, the ease of entering the specific area 343 (special selection opening) is more likely than the apparent probability of entering the specific area 343 (special selection opening) (1/6) A higher visual effect can be achieved (however, the theoretical probability of entering a ball is 1/10). Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the opening depth (radial depth) of the specific region 343 is formed larger than the opening depth (radial depth) of the normal region 344. Thereby, a further visual effect that the specific region 343 (special selection port) is easier to enter than the normal region 344 (normal selection port) is exhibited, and the player's willingness to play is promoted.

  In addition, a game ball carry-in device 380 is interposed in the guide passage 340 so that the game ball flowing down the guide passage 340 can be lifted to the inlet 347 of the rotary sorter 294. . The game ball carry-in device 380 has a carry-in piece 341 that allows only one game ball to reach the inflow port 347, and a carry-in piece 341 that is lowered to a position facing the guide passage 340 so that a game ball can be received, And a distribution device drive mechanism 336 (see FIG. 36) for raising the game ball held in the carry-in piece 341 and rotating it between the charging position where it can flow into the inflow port 347. Yes. The distribution device drive mechanism 336 includes a solenoid 400, a plunger 401, a link arm 402, and a distribution device drive sensor 403.

  Then, the game ball carry-in device 380 rotates the link arm 402 about the link shaft 404 as a rotation axis by the movement of the plunger 401 of the solenoid 400. The link arm 402 slides the carry-in piece 341 back and forth by a link mechanism. In this way, the reciprocating motion of the plunger 401 is converted into the reciprocating motion of the loading piece 341 and can be displaced from the receiving position to the loading position. Note that the plunger 401 protrudes leftward when not energized, and the carry-in piece 341 is kept at the closing position via the link arm 402. Further, whether the carry-in piece 341 is displaced to the receiving position or the loading position can be detected by the sorting device drive sensor 403. That is, if the link arm 402 is detected by the distribution device drive sensor 403, the carry-in piece 341 is positioned at the loading position, while if the link arm 402 is not detected by the distribution device drive sensor 403, the carry-in piece 341 is loaded. The piece 341 is located at the receiving position.

  A discharge port 348 that discharges a game ball that does not fit in the carry-in piece 341 when the carry-in piece 341 is in the loading position is formed to open at the end of the guide passage 340, and the game ball that has flowed into the discharge port 348 Flows down from the third outflow passage 389 to the sorting device discharge passage 274 (see FIG. 17). In addition, when a plurality of game balls flow down the guide passage 340 one after another, only one game ball is accommodated in the carry-in piece 341 even when the carry-in piece 341 is in the receiving position, and other game balls are carried in It contacts the game ball contained in the piece 341 and stays in the guide passage 340, resumes rolling as the carry-in piece 341 rises, and flows into the discharge port 348. A game ball detection means 386 is provided in the middle of the third outflow path 389 through which the game ball flowing out from the discharge port 348 flows down, and flows into the discharge port 348 by this game ball detection means 386 (that is, a specific A game ball that has not won any of the area 343 and the normal area 344 is detected and counted.

  Thus, by interposing the game ball carry-in device 380 in the guide passage 340, it becomes difficult to predict the timing of the game ball reaching the inflow port 347, and a special way of hitting the specific area 343 is suppressed. Is possible. In addition, since the game ball carry-in device 380 is provided with the carry-in piece 341, even if the number of game balls to be won in the big prize opening 141 is increased, the game balls that can enter the specific area 343 of the rotating body 297 can be obtained. The number can be limited. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden at the game store while increasing the player's expectation due to winning.

  The rotating body driving means 405 that rotates the rotating shaft 364 includes a rotating body motor 369 that generates a rotating force that rotates the rotating body 297, a rotating drive gear 368 that transmits power of the rotating body motor 369, a rotating shaft 364, and a rotating body. A rotating body back cover 382 that supports the motor 369 and the middle frame 383 and rotatably supports the rotating shaft 364 of the rotating body 297 is provided. A rail-shaped rotational position detection plate 363 is provided on the back surface of the rotating body 297 so as to protrude. The rotational position detection plate 363 is detected by a rotational position sensor 362 disposed substantially at the center of the rotational body case 342, whereby the rotational position of the rotational body 297 is specified.

  Note that the rotary sorter 294 has a configuration for decorating the rotating body 297 with light emitting means provided therein. In other words, the decorative plate 366 and the LED substrate 365 are disposed on the back side of the rotating body 297 so as to overlap each other in the gap with the rotating body case 342. The decorative plate 366 is a disc body having a slightly smaller diameter than the rotating body 297 and formed of a light-transmitting plastic. The LED substrate 365 is a substantially circular substrate having a substantially same diameter as the rotating body 297 and having a plurality of LEDs disposed thereon. Further, an LED substrate 381, which is a substantially arc-shaped substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, is attached to the back surface of the middle frame 383. Furthermore, three window portions 367 formed of a plastic transparent plate are provided, and a player can visually recognize the light emission mode inside the rotating body case 342 through these window portions 367. In particular, the three window portions 367 and the decorative plate 366 are formed with uneven surfaces so that the light emitted from each LED is diffusely reflected, and according to the rotational drive of the rotator 297, The light emission mode (irradiation mode of the rotating body 297) inside changes. In addition, the plurality of LEDs arranged on the semicircular arc on the LED board 381 have their light emission mode changed from the player on the front side through the specific area 343 and the normal area 344 formed on the outer peripheral portion of the rotating body 297. Visible.

  Next, the prize opening unit 499 having the normal symbol start port 96 and the attacker device 98 and the special start port unit 530 having the normal electric accessory 81 and the special symbol start port 82 will be described.

[About the winning prize unit]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is a front view showing the prize opening unit, FIG. 34 is a perspective view showing the prize opening unit from the upper right front, and FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. is there.

  The winning a prize opening unit 499 includes a normal symbol starting port 96 disposed so as to protrude from the board surface of the game board 5 (see FIG. 3) to the player side, and a normal winning device disposed below the normal symbol starting port 96. 502, a distribution projection 507 that protrudes from the bottom of the normal winning device 502 to the player side, and an attacker device 98 that is disposed below the distribution projection 507. Has been.

  Here, the normal symbol start port 96 is a gate-type start port through which a game ball flowing down the game area 37 (see FIG. 3) can pass, and inside the normal symbol start port 96 there is a game ball at the normal symbol start port 96. A first start port sensor 317 is provided for detecting the passage. The normal lottery is performed based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 317. Further, on both the left and right sides of the normal symbol starting port 96, an entry preventing member 512 having an arcuate upper surface extends obliquely downward, and the game ball passing outside the normal symbol starting port 96 is distributed. Rolling toward the projection 507 is prevented. That is, only the game balls that have passed through the normal symbol start port 96 can reach the sorting protrusion 507.

  The normal winning device 502 has a normal winning opening 500 that opens to the surface of the game board 5 and a winning passage 501 that communicates with the normal winning opening 500 and extends to the back side of the gaming board 5. It is possible to win a game ball in the winning path 501 from the normal winning opening 500. In addition, when a game ball wins the normal winning opening 500, it is detected by a win sensor (not shown), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on this.

  The distribution protrusion 507 has an upper surface inclined portion 506 that is slightly inclined downward toward the game board 5 side (ordinary winning opening 500 side), and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface inclined portion 506. It is possible to guide the game ball that has dropped to the normal winning opening 500 along the upper surface inclined portion 506, and the game ball that has dropped to the vicinity of the left end portion or the right end portion of the upper surface inclined portion 506 to the side of the upper surface inclined portion 506. It can be discharged from. In addition, the distribution projection 507 is normally disposed directly below the symbol start opening 96, so that the maximum horizontal width of the distribution projection 507 is substantially equal to the outer diameter of the game ball, and the horizontal width is narrower toward the tip side. It is formed in a tapered shape in plan view (home base shape as a whole).

  The attacker device 98 is disposed below the sorting projection 507, and closes the horizontally long lower prize-winning port 83 and the lower side big prize-winning port 83 that allow a large amount of game balls to be won, and the lower end. An opening / closing member 99 supported so as to be rotatable in the front-rear direction with the portion as a rotation axis, a closed position for driving the opening / closing member 99 to close the lower side big prize opening 83, and an open position for opening the lower side big prize opening 83 An attacker drive mechanism 339 (see FIG. 36). In addition, a count sensor 319 (see FIG. 36) for detecting a game ball won in the lower side large winning opening 83 is provided inside the lower large winning opening 83. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the detection of the game balls by the count sensor 319, and the number of game balls that have entered the lower large winning opening 83 is counted.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 35, the lower surface 513 of the distribution projection 507 facing the upper surface of the opening / closing member 99 is formed in an upward gradient toward the game board 5 side. Thereby, the distance between the upper end of the opening / closing member 99 and the lower surface 513 of the sorting projection 507 can be made substantially constant regardless of the rotation position of the opening / closing member 99, and consequently the upper end of the opening / closing member 99. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being sandwiched between the lower surface 513 of the sorting projection 507 and so-called “ball biting”.

  Since the sorting projection 507 does not include a movable mechanism, even when the attacker device 98 having the attacker driving mechanism 339 is provided below the sorting projection 507, the sorting projection 507 can be arranged close to each other. The length from the lower side large winning opening 83 to the normal symbol starting port 96 can be made relatively short.

  By the way, the normal symbol starting port 96, the normal winning device 502, the sorting projection 507, and the attacker device 98 are attached to a common base plate 510 and integrally configured as one unit. In addition, a nail through hole 511 for allowing the obstacle nail 508 provided in the game board 5 to be inserted is formed between the normal symbol starting port 96 and the normal winning port 500 in the base plate 510. That is, the obstacle nail 508 provided on the game board 5 can be arranged inside the unit, although the normal symbol starting port 96 and the normal winning device 502 are integrally formed as one unit. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the obstacle nail 508 is disposed between the normal symbol starting port 96 and the normal winning device 502, and swings by changing the rolling direction of the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol starting port 96. The dropping points on the minute projection 507 are dispersed. In particular, in this example, the obstacle nail 508 includes a right obstacle nail 508a and a left obstacle nail 508b arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and a center line connecting the center of the normal symbol start port 96 and the center of the normal winning port 500 is shown. When the reference line is used, the right obstacle nail 508a and the left obstacle nail 508b are biased toward one side so that the distances from the reference line to the right obstacle nail 508a and the left obstacle nail 508b are different from each other. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the rolling direction of the game ball from being changed significantly by passing the game ball between the obstacle nails 508. That is, almost all of the game balls that have passed through the normal symbol starting port 96 can be dropped onto the upper surface of the sorting projection 507. In addition, the game balls that have passed through the normal symbol starting port 96 can collide with the respective obstacle nails 508 in order, and the rolling direction can be reliably changed.

  The base plate 510 extends in the left-right direction, and on the right side, a winning opening 514 that opens upward is formed. In addition, a case member 516 is attached to the back surface of the base plate 510, and an attacker driving mechanism 339 is accommodated in the case member 516, and a game ball won in the lower large winning opening 83 is flowed out. A guide passage (not shown) for guiding to (not shown) is formed. Further, on the upper surface of the case member 516, a feeding passage 517 is provided for sending the game ball won in the winning passage 501 of the normal winning device 502 to a passage in the case member 516 (a passage different from the guide passage). ing.

  In this way, in the prize opening unit 499, when the game ball flowing down the game area 37 passes through the normal symbol start port 96, it is detected by the first start port sensor 317, and the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 96. Based on this, a normal lottery is executed. The rolling direction of the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start port 96 is changed by the obstacle nail 508 disposed below the normal symbol start port 96. Also, an ordinary winning device 502 is provided below the obstacle nail 508, and when a game ball wins the normal winning device 502, it is detected by a winning sensor (not shown) and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. .

  Below the normal winning device 502, a distribution projection 507 is provided so as to protrude toward the player side, and the distribution projection 507 faces the game board 5 side (normal winning port 500 side). Since the upper surface inclined portion 506 formed with a slight downward slope is provided, it is possible to guide the game ball that has dropped onto the upper surface inclined portion 506 to the normal winning opening 500 along the upper surface inclined portion 506. In particular, since the lateral width of the distribution projection 507 is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball, it is guided from the side of the upper surface inclined portion 506 to the normal winning opening 500 along the upper surface inclined portion 506 (deviation). ). That is, the game ball that has dropped to the substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface inclined portion 506 is guided to the normal winning opening 500 along the upper surface inclined portion 506, while the vicinity of the left end portion or the right end portion of the upper surface inclined portion 506 ( In other words, the game ball that has dropped to the vicinity of the corner portion is discharged from the side of the upper surface inclined portion 506.

[Special start unit]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 29 is a front view showing the special starter unit, FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing the special starter unit from the upper right front, and FIG. 31 shows a state in which the components of the special starter unit are separated from the upper left rear. 32 is a perspective view, and FIG. 32 is a cut perspective view showing a state where the special start port unit is cut in the vertical direction.

  The special start port unit 530 has a special symbol start port 82 opened to the board surface of the game board 5 (see FIG. 3), and a winning path that extends to the back side of the game board 5 in communication with the special symbol start port 82. 531 (see FIG. 30), a receiving device supported slidably between an immersion position located in the winning path 531 and a protruding position protruding from the special symbol starting port 82 toward the player. The stop guiding member 535 and the ordinary accessory driving mechanism 334 (see FIG. 36) for sliding the receiving guide member 535 in the front-rear direction are configured.

  The winning path 531 is formed in the winning device casing 538, and the front opening portion thereof serves as a special symbol starting port 82. The special symbol starting port 82 is formed in a convex shape so that the width on the lower side is wider than that on the upper side.

  The receiving guide member 535 is a tongue-like member having an inclined surface 534 formed in a downward slope toward the back side of the game board 5 (back side of the winning path 531), and the game area 37 (see FIG. 3). ) Is received at the protruding position, and the received game ball is guided to the special symbol starting port 82. A projection 536 is formed upward at the tip of the receiving guide member 535.

  As described above, in the special start-up unit 530, when the receiving guide member 535 is in the immersive position, it is impossible to receive the game ball that is accommodated in the winning path 531 and flows down the game area 37. That is, the special symbol starting port 82 cannot enter the game ball. On the other hand, when winning in the normal lottery, the normal accessory driving mechanism 334 is controlled, and the receiving guide member 535 is displaced from the immersion position to the protruding position. In this state, the tongue-shaped receiving guide member 535 protrudes toward the player side from the special symbol starting port 82, and the game ball flowing down the game area 37 can be received. Then, the game ball received by the inclined surface 534 of the receiving guide member 535 is guided to the special symbol starting port 82 according to the inclined surface 534. In other words, the game ball can be awarded to the special symbol start opening 82. At this time, even if the receiving guide member 535 moves, the protrusion 536 is directed upward at the top end portion of the receiving guide member 535 to ensure that the game ball enters the special symbol starting port 82 according to the inclined surface 534. It is provided so that the game ball does not spill from the tip of the receiving guide member 535. Further, since the game ball rolls toward the special symbol starting port 82 side, even if the inclination degree on the inclined surface 534 of the receiving guide member 535 is relatively gentle, it is smooth toward the special symbol starting port 82. Can be guided to.

  In addition, since the inclined surface 534 of the receiving guide member 535 is formed with a slight downward slope toward the back side of the game board 5, when the receiving guide member 535 is in the protruding position, The substantial opening area of the special symbol start port 82 becomes wider than that. That is, when the receiving guide member 535 is in the immersive position, the tip of the receiving guide member 535, which is the highest position among the receiving guide members 535, is located near the special symbol starting port 82, The upper space (relatively narrow opening) is a substantial opening portion of the special symbol start opening 82. On the other hand, when the receiving guide member 535 is in the protruding position, the central portion or the root portion of the receiving guide member 535 that is lower than the tip of the receiving guide member 535 is located near the special symbol start port 82, A space above that portion (a relatively wide frontage) is a substantial opening of the special symbol starter 82. Therefore, when the receiving guide member 535 is in the protruding position, the opening area is increased and the winning of the game ball is ensured. On the other hand, when the receiving guide member 535 is in the immersed position, the opening area is reduced and the game area 37 ( The jumping of the game ball due to the rebound in FIG. 3) can be suppressed.

  By the way, the receiving guide member 535 has a pointed shape with a sharp tip toward the player side so that the number of locations where the ball is engaged is extremely small. Therefore, when the tip of the receiving guide member 535 comes into contact with the center of the game ball, there is still a possibility of biting the ball, but even if the tip of the receiving guide member 535 is slightly from the center of the game ball. In the case of deviation, a force in a direction away from the tip of the receiving guide member 535 is applied to the game ball, and the game ball is not pinched. Since the protrusion 536 is also formed in a shape that exhibits a convex isosceles triangle toward the special symbol start port 82 in a plan view, the game ball can be slightly displaced from the center if it touches the game ball. Is not pinched. Further, the projection 536 reduces the opening area of the special symbol starting port 82 when the receiving guide member 535 is in the immersive position, so that the game ball is moved to the special symbol starting port 82 when the receiving guiding member 535 is in the immersive position. It is possible to prevent entry.

  Further, wall portions 539 are erected from the left and right edge portions of the receiving guide member 535, and these wall portions 539 extend toward the back side of the winning path 531. According to this, the game ball received by the receiving guide member 535 can be guided toward the special symbol starting port 82 side without being discharged (dropped) from the left and right sides of the receiving guide member 535. . Further, the receiving guide member 535 can be formed in a flat plate shape. As a result, even if the height of the special symbol start port 82 and the winning passage 531 is relatively low, the receiving guiding member 535 can be inserted into the winning passage 531. It is possible to provide a space for receiving the game ball to be housed inside and above the receiving guide member 535. In addition, since the front-end | tip part of the receiving guidance member 535 is formed in the flat plate shape which does not have the wall part 539 in a right-and-left edge part, even when a player sees the receiving guidance member 535 from right and left diagonally forward. The behavior of the game ball rolling on the receiving guide member 535 can be clearly seen. Further, by omitting the wall portion of the tip portion, the left and right frontage on the tip side becomes wide, and when the receiving guide member 535 returns to the immersive position, the game ball placed on the receiving guide member 535 is placed. Can be easily discharged from the distal end portion of the receiving guide member 535.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32, an outlet 541 through which a game ball won in the special winning device 532 flows out from the winning passage 531 is formed in the center portion of the bottom surface of the winning device casing 538, and the receiving guiding member Between the pair of wall portions 539 on the rear side of 535, an opening portion 542 that always communicates with the outflow port 541 is formed regardless of the position of the receiving guide member 535. Therefore, not only when the receiving guide member 535 is in the protruding position, but also when the receiving guide member 535 is in the immersive position before the game ball flows out of the winning path 531, the opening portion 542 and the flow The game ball can be discharged through the outlet 541. In particular, a movable guide wall 543 that guides a winning game ball to the outlet 541 is provided between the pair of walls 539 behind the opening 542, and the movable guide wall 543 has a position where the receiving guide member 535 protrudes. It is comprised so that it may be located in the back vicinity of the outflow port 541 at the time. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the game ball won in the special symbol starting port 82 from entering behind the movable guide wall 543 and to drop naturally toward the outlet 541. In addition, since the movable guide wall 543 is provided horizontally between the pair of wall portions 539, the pair of wall portions 539 can be supported in parallel and deformation of the wall portion 539 can be suppressed. The outflow port 541 is provided with a game ball detection means 553 (second start port sensor 318) for detecting a game ball passing through the outflow port 541. The special ball start port 82 is provided by the game ball detection unit 553. It is detected that the game ball has won.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 30, the winning device casing 538 is divided into an opaque front case portion 545 and a rear case portion 546 made of a light transmissive member, and is formed on the front surface of the front case portion 545. The flange portion 547 is fixed to the board surface of the game board 5. That is, three attachment holes 557 are formed in the flange portion 547, and screws or the like (not shown) are inserted into the attachment holes 557 and screwed to the game board 5, so that the board surface of the game board 5 is formed. Mounted. Inside the rear case portion 546, a guide portion for restricting sliding of the pair of wall portions 539 in the front-rear direction is formed so as to sandwich the wall portion 539, and the receiving guide member 535 is smoothly slid. Making it possible.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, a solenoid 548 that transmits power by the transmission mechanism 540 and functions as a drive source of the receiving guide member 535 is accommodated in the rear case portion 546. The solenoid 548 is disposed so that the tip of the plunger 549 faces the player side. An arm member 551 is provided between the plunger 549 and the wall portion 539 so that the reciprocating linear motion of the plunger 549 is reversed and transmitted to the wall portion 539.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30, a braking gate member 554 formed so as to protrude from the board surface of the game board 5 to the player side is provided above the special symbol starting port 82. The brake gate member 554 allows the game ball flowing down the game area 37 to pass while being braked, and is set so that the inner diameter is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. According to this, since the game ball that has passed through the brake gate member 554 and the momentum is suppressed is placed on the upper surface of the receiving guide member 535, the game ball can be settled on the receiving guide member 535. Therefore, it is possible to reliably guide the game ball dropped on the receiving guide member 535 toward the special symbol starting port 82. Further, the impact received by the receiving guide member 535 is weakened, and the receiving guide member 535 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged.

  A pair of entry preventing members 558 extend obliquely downward on both the left and right sides of the brake gate member 554. The entry preventing member 558 prevents the game ball passing outside the braking gate member 554 from rolling toward the receiving guide member 535, and according to this, the passing ball has passed through the braking gate member 554. Only the game ball can be placed on the receiving guide member 535, and the game ball received by the receiving guide member 535 is not affected by another game ball that does not pass through the braking gate member 554, that is, a game ball with strong momentum. It can be prevented from being played.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present example having the above-described physical configuration, the lower portion of the opening 124 is partitioned by the partition plate 40, and the game ball flowing down the game area 37 passes through the opening 124. Since the entry to the stage 20 is prevented, the game ball that has entered from the opening 124 comes into contact with another game ball that rolls on the stage 20 to change the trajectory of the game ball, and in the distribution process It is possible to suppress the possibility that the player feels uncomfortable by influencing. In addition, since the game balls do not flow into the stage 20 from other than the warp inlet 63, it is possible to reduce the variation in the winning rate of the game balls via the stage 20. That is, when a game ball flows from the opening 124, the rate at which the game ball flows into the stage 20 increases, and the route through which the game ball flows into the stage 20 increases. Although it tends to be difficult to control and results in destabilization of the profits of the game shop, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in order to prevent the game ball from entering the stage from the opening 124, such a problem occurs. Can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the partition plate 40 is erected on the player side of the stage 20, blocks the lower part of the opening 124 of the center accessory 91, and prevents the game ball from flowing out. The game ball that has flowed into the stage 20 does not flow out of the stage 20 in a very short time, and the player can be shown to the player how the game ball rolls on the stage 20.

  In addition, in order to prevent the partition plate 40 from flowing out from the opening 124, the game ball that has flowed into the stage 20 always flows out from the specific outlet 24 or the normal outlet 25, and the game ball flows to the specific outlet 24 at a predetermined rate. The ball enters and flows down the specific outflow path 26. Therefore, the variation in the probability of entering the normal symbol starting port 96 is reduced. Since the game ball that has flowed into the stage 20 does not deviate from the opening 124, the unwilling situation for the player is reduced, and the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind without causing the player to feel distrust. be able to.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the partition plate 40 is a plate-like member, there is almost no risk of failure or breakage, and even if the partition plate 40 is erected on the player side of the stage 20, the game It will not be a burden on the store. The player can tackle the game with peace of mind because the game is not interrupted by a failure caused by the partition plate 40 or an accident occurs.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the partition plate 40 is erected at the lower portion of the opening 124 and functions as a wall at the lower end portion of the front edge of the opening 124, but is formed of a translucent material. Therefore, the visibility of the stage 20 and the effect display device 115 located in the back is not impaired. In other words, since the partition plate 40 does not obstruct the field of view and the game is not hindered, the possibility that the player feels dissatisfied can be reduced.

  Moreover, since the upper part of the partition plate 40 is open, it is not necessary to remove the partition plate 40 when performing maintenance such as cleaning and adjustment inside the center accessory 91, and the maintenance work can be performed smoothly. Since the partition plate 40 is a substantially oval member, there is no protruding portion such as a corner upward, and the occurrence of an accident in which a maintenance operator is injured or damages the partition plate 40 can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the partition plate 40 is formed of a translucent material, and the visual effect around the stage 20 can be enhanced by changing the transmitted light. it can. In this example, a part of the partition plate 40 is thin in the vicinity of the outflow portion 62, so that the player can pay attention to the outflow portion 62.

[Electric configuration of pachinko machine]
Next, the electrical configuration of such a pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail. FIG. 36 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The pachinko machine 1 is mainly configured to include a main board 780 and a peripheral board 781.
Here, the main substrate 780 is
・ Game ball detection.
・ Lottery processing related to various wins.
-Fluctuation display control for special symbols and normal symbols.
・ Control for paying out prize balls (payout control).
It is a part that performs various controls so that the game progresses according to a predetermined rule.

On the other hand, the peripheral substrate 781 includes:
・ Lighting control of production lamp.
・ Sound control.
-Display control of production images.
In other words, it is a part that adds various effects to the game progressed by the main board 780, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Main board]
The main board 780 includes a main control board 765 and a payout control board 775. Among them, the main control board 765 includes a main control MPU 765a as a microprocessor, a main control I / O port 765b as an input / output device (I / O device), the inspection connector 218, and a RAM described later. A clear switch 769 and the like are provided.

  Here, the main control MPU 765a includes a ROM as a read-only memory in which a control program and various commands relating to the progress of the game are stored, a RAM as a readable / writable memory in which stored data is updated each time, and those It has a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), various functions for preventing fraud, and the like. The main control MPU 765a includes the first start port sensor 317, the second start port sensor 318, the count sensor 319, the winning port sensor 330, the V winning sensor 331, the discharge sensor 313, and the like. Detection signals from various sensors are input via the main control I / O port 765b.

  That is, by executing a control program stored in the ROM based on such a detection signal, a normal accessory driving mechanism 334, a prize winning opening / closing mechanism 335, a sorting device driving mechanism 336, an attacker driving mechanism 339, etc. As a result, drive signals are appropriately output to various actuators, whereby various games played in the pachinko machine 1 proceed according to predetermined rules. As will be described later, the main control MPU 765a of the main control board 765 includes display control of the special symbol display 332, the normal symbol display 333, the special reserved ball lamp 322, and the normal reserved ball lamp 323, Signals (effect command, payout command) indicating the progress of the game are also output to the peripheral board 781 and the payout control board 775.

  In this embodiment, the main control MPU 765a outputs various information (game information) related to the game to the external terminal board 371 via the main control I / O port 765b. The external terminal board 371 is a part connected to a hall computer (not shown), so that the hall computer can grasp and monitor the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1.

  As will be described later, the main control MPU 765a transmits a command about a display mode of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 to the peripheral board 781 described later via the main control I / O port 765b. .

  The main control board 765 is supplied with power from a power supply board (not shown). The power supply board includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply that supplies power to the main control board 765 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. The main control MPU 765a can store various types of information in its built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off, as will be described in detail later, by the power supplied by the capacitor. The stored information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 769 of the main control board 765 is operated when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 775 is a part that outputs a drive signal to the ball payout device 170 based on a payout command from the main control board 765. A payout control I / O port 775b as a device, an error LED display 777, an error release switch 778, a ball removal switch 779, and the like are provided.

  The payout control board 775 is connected to the ball payout device 170 via the payout relay board 108, and commands (drive signals) are exchanged with the ball payout apparatus 170 via the payout relay board 108. The ball payout device 170 includes a payout motor 172 that rotates to cut out game balls taken into the ball payout device 170 into various ball guide passages or various ball discharge passages by a ball cutout member (not shown), and a ball cutout member. A rotation angle switch 106 for detecting a rotation position (not shown), a counting switch 105 for counting the number of game balls actually paid out, and the like are provided.

  Here, the payout control MPU 775a includes a ROM as a read-only memory in which a control program and various commands for paying out a game ball (prize ball) to the player according to the progress of the game are stored. A RAM as a readable / writable memory in which data is updated each time, various functions for preventing fraud, and the like are provided. The payout control MPU 775a receives a payout command related to payout from the main control board 765 and an operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 769 via the payout control I / O port 775b. It has become. That is, the control program stored in the ROM is executed based on the payout command received in this way, so that a drive signal is output to the payout motor 172. As a result, according to the received payout command, Game balls will be paid out for the number of prize balls shown. In this embodiment, the payout control MPU 775a of the payout control board 775 is used for the winning ball to be paid out to the player when the entrance of the game ball into the center accessory 91 is detected by the winning hole sensor 330. More than the number, the control for the payout of the game ball is performed so that more prize balls are paid out when the count sensor 319 detects that the game ball has entered the lower large winning opening 83. It has become a thing.

  In the same payout control MPU 775a, when the ball removal switch 779 is operated, the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150 are discharged (ball removal) based on this operation signal (detection signal). Therefore, a drive signal to the payout motor 172 is also output. Furthermore, when a rent request signal from the prepaid card unit 1a is input via the interface board 252 described above, a drive signal to the payout motor 172 is also output based on the rent request signal.

  The payout control MPU 775a transmits various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 765 via the payout control I / O port 775b, or fills up the switch 107. When the detection signal is input, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 172 is stopped based on this detection signal, or the number of game balls actually paid out is calculated and is used as the payout control I / Or output to the external terminal board 371 via the O port 775b. Thereby, the hall computer can grasp the total number of game balls paid out from the pachinko machine 1.

  When the prepaid card unit 1 a is connected to the interface board 252, a game ball launch permission signal from the prepaid card unit 1 a is input to the above-described launch control board 372 via the interface board 252 and the payout control board 775. It is like that. When this launch permission signal is input, the launch control board 372 becomes ready to launch a game ball by the launch device 194 described above. As a result, when the operation handle 32 is operated, a detection signal from a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the operation handle 32 is input to the launch control board 372, so that the game is played by the launch device 194. A ball is fired. That is, when the operation handle 32 is operated, the detection signal from the full switch 107 is input to the payout control MPU 775a, and the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 172 is stopped. In addition, a game ball is launched by the launching device 194. In this way, the game ball launched from the launching device 194 is guided along the guide rail 78 to the launch opening 78a formed above the game area 37, and is driven toward the game area 37 from the launch opening. .

  Power is supplied to the payout control board 775 from a power supply board (not shown) in the same manner as the main control board 765. The power supply board includes a capacitor that supplies power to the payout control board 775 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With the power supplied from this capacitor, the payout control MPU 775a can store various payout information related to payout in its built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored payout information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 769 of the main control board 765 is operated when the power is turned on.

[About peripheral boards]
As shown in FIG. 36, the peripheral board 781 includes a sub-integrated board 763 and a liquid crystal control board 758.

  The sub-integrated board 763 includes a sub-integrated MPU 763a as a microprocessor, a sub-integrated ROM 763b that stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC 763c that performs high-quality sound, and music that the sound source IC 763c refers to. And a sound ROM 763d in which sound information such as sound effects is stored. That is, when an effect command is received from the main control board 765, the sub-integrated MPU 763a executes the control program based on the command, thereby sending a lighting signal to the decorative lamp 394 that is a lamp on the outer frame side. Or a lighting signal is output to the prize ball lamp 396. Further, a lighting signal is output to the effect lamp 395 that is a decorative lamp of the game board 5 or a gradation lighting signal is output to the gradation lamp 397 via the lamp driving board 46.

  Further, the effect command from the main control board 765 received by the sub integrated MPU 763a is output to the sound source IC 763c and the liquid crystal control board 758. As a result, the sound source IC 763c reads sound information from the sound ROM 763d based on the effect command output from the sub-integrated MPU 763a, so that the music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects are output from the speakers 18 and 57 as sound outputs. Will come to be.

  On the other hand, the liquid crystal control board 758 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 758a as a microprocessor, a liquid crystal control ROM 758b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a VDP (abbreviation of video display processor) 758c that controls display of the effect display device 115. An image ROM 758d for storing various images to be displayed on the effect display device 115.

  When the liquid crystal control MPU 758a receives the effect command described above from the sub-integrated board 763, the liquid crystal control MPU 758a controls the VDP 758c based on the effect command. The VDP 758c reads out an image from the image ROM 758d and controls display of the effect display device 115. If the liquid crystal control MPU 758a is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the sub-integrated board 763.

[Functional configuration of main control board and peripheral control board]
This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a functional block diagram schematically showing functional configurations of the main board and the peripheral board.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the main board 780 includes a normal symbol per-determining random number extracting means 601, a normal symbol success / failure determining means 602, a first holding means 603, a first hold releasing means 604, and a normal symbol display. Control means 605, normal symbol hold display control means 606, normal winning game execution means 607, and advantageous game execution means 608 are provided. Further, the random number extraction means 611 for determining the special symbol per unit, the special symbol success / failure determination means 612, the second hold means 613, the second hold release means 614, the special symbol display control means 615, and the special symbol hold display control means 616, jackpot game execution means 617, and small hit game execution means 618 are provided. Further, a command transmission unit 620, a discharge determination unit 621, a winning determination unit 622, and a prize ball payout unit 623 are provided.

  Here, the normal symbol per-determination random number extraction means 601 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the normal symbol start port 96 based on an output signal from the first start port sensor 317. At the same time (open mouth determination means), a random number is extracted when it is determined that the ball has been entered. The extracted random numbers are held by the first holding means 603 up to a first predetermined number (for example, four), whereby the normal symbol variation display control is put on hold. On the other hand, such a hold state is released by the first hold release unit 604 when a predetermined release condition (for example, that the previous variable display control for the normal symbol has been completed) is satisfied. Then, the normal symbol success / failure determination means 602 determines whether or not the normal symbol is won based on the released random number (first lottery process).

  However, in this embodiment, the normal symbol success / failure determination means 602 changes the display mode of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 according to the determination result of whether or not the normal winning is won. It also functions as a part to be determined in the substrate 780. Then, the display mode determined internally in this manner is variably displayed on the normal symbol display 333 by the normal symbol display control means 605 for a predetermined fluctuation time. Further, the number of holdings by the first holding unit 603 is displayed on the normal symbol holding ball lamp 323 (LED 84) by the normal symbol holding display control unit 606. In addition, when the lottery result by the normal symbol win / fail determination means 602 is normal hit, the normal hit game execution means 607 controls the driving of the normal accessory drive mechanism 334 so that the game ball enters the special symbol start port 82. The normal electric accessory 81 is operated so as to be possible.

  Further, the advantageous game executing means 608 variably sets the probability of entering the game ball into the special symbol starting port 82 to a higher probability when a predetermined condition (for example, winning a big hit) is satisfied. It is a part to do. More specifically, it is determined whether or not it is in the advantageous state described later based on the result of determination by the random number extraction means 611 for determination per special symbol described later. The result is output to the normal hit game execution means 607. As a result, the normal hit game execution means 607 activates a so-called opening extension function, and always uses an operation time for long hits (for example, “5700 ms”) described later as the operation time of the normal electric accessory 81. To come.

  On the other hand, the random number extraction means 611 for determining the special symbol hit determines whether or not a game ball has entered the special symbol starting port 82 based on the output signal from the second starting port sensor 318. At the same time, it is a part for extracting a random number when it is determined that the ball has entered. The extracted random numbers are held by the second holding means 613 up to a second predetermined number (for example, two), and the special symbol variation display control is put on hold. On the other hand, such a hold state is released by the second hold release unit 614 when a predetermined release condition (for example, that the previous variable display control for the special symbol has been completed) is satisfied. Then, the special symbol success / failure determination means 612 determines whether or not the special winning (in this case, the big winning or the small winning) has been won based on the released random number (second lottery process).

  Note that the result of the determination by the special symbol determination unit 612 is variably displayed on the special symbol display 332 by the special symbol display control unit 615. The number of holds by the second holding means 613 is displayed on the special symbol hold ball lamp 322 (LED 85) by the special symbol hold display control means 616. Also, when the lottery result by the special symbol success / failure determination means 612 is a small winning game, the small winning game execution means 617 controls the driving of the special winning opening / closing mechanism 335 so that the special winning opening 141 is opened. Is operated to allow a game ball to enter the area in the center accessory 91 (small hit game). When the lottery result by the special symbol success / failure determination means 612 is a big win, the big hit game execution means 618 controls the attacker drive mechanism 339 to enter the game ball into the lower big winning opening 83 through the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 99. Is possible (a jackpot game).

  Further, the command transmission means 620 displays the determination results (the results of the first and second lottery processes) by the normal symbol success / failure determination means 602 and the special symbol success / failure determination means 612, information related to the lottery results, and the like. This is a part for transmitting the command shown to the peripheral board 781. The “information related to the lottery result” corresponds to, for example, the display mode of the effect image determined internally, the effect time, and the like.

  The discharge determination means 621 detects that the game ball has flowed out of the specific area 343 by the V winning sensor 331 or that the discharge sensor 313 has detected that the game ball has flowed out of the normal area 344. Based on the above, it is detected that the game ball is discharged from the center accessory 91.

  Also, the winning determination means 622 determines which of the big winning hole 141 and the lower large winning hole 83 the gaming ball has won by detecting the gaming ball by the winning hole sensor 330 and detecting the gaming ball by the count sensor 319. It is the part to judge. Then, according to the determination result by the winning determination means 622, the winning ball paying means 623 controls the ball paying operation of the ball paying device 170, and the game is played according to the winning at the big winning opening 141 or the lower large winning opening 83. Pay out the ball. When winning a prize at the lower winning prize opening 83, more prize balls are paid out than when winning at the winning prize opening 141. In this embodiment, the prize ball payout means 623 is provided as a payout control board 775, and a predetermined number of game balls are also paid out even when winning a special symbol start port 82 (second start port sensor 318).

  On the other hand, the peripheral board 781 includes command receiving means 630, normal symbol image display control means 631, and special symbol image display control means 632.

  Here, the command receiving unit 630 is configured to determine the results of the determination by the normal symbol determination unit 602 and the special symbol determination unit 612 (results of the first and second lottery processes), information related to the lottery result, and the like. Is a part for receiving the command indicating from the command transmitting means 620 of the main board 780.

  Further, the normal symbol image display control means 631 is a part for variably displaying the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 based on the command related to the normal hit among the commands received by the command receiving means 630. It is. More specifically, the normal symbol image display control means 631 is configured such that the display mode corresponding to the lottery result for the normal hit determined in the main board 780 is the main effect image on the effect display device 115. And the variable display output in the form that the display mode appears as a modest effect image than the main effect image.

[Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 765 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, followed by main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interruption processing, prize ball command and self-check command transmission processing, and ACK signal input determination processing. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 38, and FIG. 40 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of a prize ball command and self-check command transmission process, and FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of an ACK signal input determination process. The prize ball command and self-check command transmission process and the ACK signal input determination process are performed as one process of the prize ball control process in step S80 in the main control timer interruption process described later.

<1. Various random numbers>
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for determining a normal symbol used in a lottery process for a winning (ordinary hit) that triggers an operation of the ordinary electric accessory (movable member) 81, and the normal symbol Random number for determining the initial value of the normal symbol used for determining the initial value of the random number for determining the winning symbol, and the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol used for determining the variable display pattern displayed on the normal symbol display 333 In addition, a random number for determining a normal symbol to be used for a lottery process for a display pattern when the variable symbol display is stopped is prepared. In addition, a special symbol hit determination random number used for the lottery processing for the small win and the big win and a special symbol hit determination initial value determination used for determining the initial value of the special symbol hit determination random number Random numbers for use, a random number for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol used for determining a variation display pattern to be displayed on the special symbol display 332, and a special symbol used for a lottery process for a display pattern when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped A random number for determination is prepared.

<2. Main control side power-on processing>
When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 765a of the main control board 765 performs main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. When the main control side power-on process is started, an interrupt mode is set (step S10). This interrupt mode sets the priority order of interrupts of the main control MPU 765a. In the present embodiment, a main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the main control timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed. Subsequent to step S10, input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) is performed (step S12). In this I / O input / output setting, input / output setting of the I / O port of the main control MPU 765a is performed. Following step S12, the watchdog timer built in the main control MPU 765a is set to be valid (step S14). This watchdog timer is for monitoring the operation (system) of the main control MPU 765a, and when it is not cleared for a certain period of time, the main control MPU 765a is reset (whether the system of the main control MPU 765a is out of control). Diagnose regularly).

  Following step S14, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S16). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage decreases. A power failure signal is input when the voltage is equal to or lower than the power failure notice voltage from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage. Therefore, in the wait timer process 1, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Subsequent to step S16, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 769 is operated (step S18). This determination is performed based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 769 of the main control board 765 is operated and an operation signal (detection signal) is input to the main control board 765. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 769 is operated. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 769 is not operated.

  When the RAM clear switch 769 is operated in step S18, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S20). On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 769 is not operated in step S18, the RAM clear is cleared. A value 0 is set in the notification flag RCL-FLG (step S22). This RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 765a, and game information related to games such as advantageous games and unpaid prize balls. Is a flag indicating whether or not to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S20 and step S22 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 765a.

  Following step S20 or step S22, wait timer processing 2 is performed (step S24). In this wait timer process 2, the system waits until the system that performs display control of the effect display device 115 by the liquid crystal control board 758 is started (booted). For example, various control programs compressed from the liquid crystal control ROM 758b are read out and expanded and stored in a RAM built in the liquid crystal control MPU 758a. In the present embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer). Subsequent to step S24, a setting for permitting access to the main internal RAM is performed (step S26). With this setting, the main built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, game information can be written (stored) or read. Subsequent to step S26, the stack pointer is set (step S28). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S28, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Following step S28, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S30). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when erasing game information and a value 0 when not erasing game information. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S30, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S32). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main internal RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum. Subsequent to step S32, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the main control side power-off process (power-off) described later (step S34). . If they match, it is determined whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S36). The backup flag BK-FLG indicates whether or not backup information such as game information, a checksum value, and a backup flag BK-FLG value is stored and held in the main built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. It is a flag, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main control-side power-off process is not terminated normally.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S36, that is, when the main control side power-off process has been completed normally, the work area of the main internal RAM is set as the time of power recovery (step S38). In this setting, in addition to setting the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0, power recovery information is read from a ROM built in the main control MPU 765a (hereinafter referred to as “main built-in ROM”). Information is set in the work area of the main internal RAM. Here, “at power recovery” includes not only a state in which the power is turned off but also a state in which the power is turned on, and also a state in which power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure. Subsequent to step S38, power-on command creation processing is performed (step S40). In the power-on command creation process, game information is read from the backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main internal RAM. Note that various commands will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S30, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values do not match in step S34, or step S36. When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally, the entire area of the main internal RAM is cleared (step S42). As a setting, the work area of the main internal RAM is set (step S44). In this setting, the initial information is read from the main internal ROM and the initial information is set in the work area of the main internal RAM. Subsequent to step S44, RAM clear notification and test command creation processing is performed (step S46). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a RAM clear notification command for notifying the sub-integrated board 763 that the main built-in RAM has been cleared and initial setting has been performed, and various inspections of the sub-integrated board 763 are performed. And a test command for generating the test command, and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main internal RAM. When the sub-integrated board 763 receives the RAM clear notification command, the RAM clear notification command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 758. On the other hand, when the test command is received, the sound source IC 763c, the liquid crystal control board 758, and the lamp driving board 46 are changed. Send a test command for inspection.

  Subsequent to step S40 or step S46, interrupt initialization is performed (step S48). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms. Subsequent to step S48, interrupt permission is set. (Step S50). With this setting, the main control timer interruption process is repeated every interruption cycle set in step S48, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S50, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S52). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this watchdog timer clear register WCL in order. Following step S52, it is determined whether a power failure signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure signal is input as a power failure warning when the voltage is equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure signal. When no power failure signal is input in step S54, non-winning random number update processing is performed (step S56).

  In this non-winning random number update process, the above-described normal symbol hitting determination initial value determining random number, fluctuation pattern determining random number, and the like are updated. For example, the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number increases the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the normal symbol hit determination random number by 1 each time the main control timer interrupt processing described later is performed. (Count up). This counter counts up from an initial value determining random number for hit determination of a normal symbol to an upper limit value when the random value for determining the initial value for determining the hit of a normal symbol is set (updated) by non-winning random number update processing, Subsequently, it counts up from the lower limit value to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol. Then, the random value for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is updated again by the non-winning random number update process. As described above, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. It should be noted that the above-described special symbol hit determination initial value determination random number, fluctuation pattern determination random number, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update processing. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the special symbol is the same as the method for updating the random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Following step S56, the process returns to step S52 again to set the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. In step S54, it is determined whether or not there is a power failure signal. The non-winning random number update process is performed, and Steps S52 to S56 are repeated. The processes in steps S52 to S56 are referred to as “main control side main process”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure signal is input in step S54, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected. Subsequent to step S58, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S60). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above. Subsequent to step S60, the value 1 is set to the backup flag BK-FLG. (Step S62) This completes the storage of the backup information. Subsequent to step S62, prohibition of access to the main internal RAM is set (step S64). With this setting, access to the main built-in RAM is prohibited, and writing and reading cannot be performed, and backup information stored in the main built-in RAM is protected. Subsequent to step S64, the watchdog timer is cleared (step S66). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Following step S66, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. For this reason, the main control MPU 765a is reset, and the main control MPU 765a performs the main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing of step S58 to step S66 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 765a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S34, it is checked whether the backup information stored in the main built-in RAM is normal, and in step S36, it is checked whether the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. is doing. In this way, by checking the backup information stored in the main built-in RAM twice, it is inspected whether the backup information is stored by fraud.

<3. Main control timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt period (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 765a of the main control board 765 sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 40 (step S70). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the main process on the main control side is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, the value of the general register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main process on the main control side from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S70, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S72). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S52 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

  Subsequent to step S72, switch input processing is performed (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the main control I / O port 765b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main built-in RAM. For example, a detection signal from the first start sensor 317 that detects a game ball that has entered the normal symbol start port 96, and a detection from the second start port sensor 318 that detects a game ball that has entered the special symbol start port 82. A signal, a detection signal from the winning port sensor 330 that detects a game ball that has entered the big winning port 141, a detection signal from the count sensor 319 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower big winning port 83, and a specific area 343 A detection signal from the V winning sensor 331 that detects a game ball that has flowed out from the game, a detection signal from the discharge sensor 313 that detects a game ball that has flowed out from the normal area 344, and a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process described later. The ACK signal from the payout control board 775 that informs that the payout control board 775 has received normally is read and stored in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S74, a timer subtraction process is performed (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 332 is turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, determined in the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process described later. In addition to the time during which the special symbol display 332 is turned on in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern, an ACK signal is transmitted that indicates that the payout control board 775 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 765 (main control MPU 765a). Time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the signal is input is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Is subtracted every 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, so that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern of the special symbol or the fluctuation display pattern of the normal symbol is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, 100 ms is set as the ACK signal input determination time, and every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0 so that the ACK signal input is determined. Judgment time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S76, a winning random number update process is performed (step S78). In this winning random number update process, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol determination random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number etc. updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) are also updated. To do. Randomness for initial value determination for determining a normal symbol hit is updated in the main control-side main process and the main control-side timer interrupt process, thereby increasing the randomness. On the other hand, since the normal symbol hit determination random number and the normal symbol determination random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (ordinary winning determination), each counter is incremented only when the winning random number update process is performed. For example, the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number counts up the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the normal symbol hit determination random number every time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. This counter counts up from a random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol to an upper limit value, and then counts up from a lower limit value to an initial value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the normal symbol hit determination random numbers, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random numbers are updated by this winning random number update processing. The hit determination random number and the hit determination initial value determination random number described above are also updated by the winning random number update process. The special symbol hit determination random number and the like are the same as the above-described method of updating the normal symbol hit determination random number, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Subsequent to step S78, prize ball control processing is performed (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-described input state storage area, and a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on this input information, or the board of the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775. Or create a self-check command to check the connection status. Then, the created prize ball command or self-check command is transmitted to the payout control board 775. For example, when one game ball enters the lower large winning opening 83, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 775, or the prize ball command is paid out. When the ACK signal notifying that the board 775 has been normally received is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 65 and the payout control board 775 is created and the payout control board 775 is created. Or send to. Detailed descriptions thereof will be described later.

  Following step S80, a prize ball check process is performed (step S82). In this prize ball check process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when a game ball enters the lower side big winning opening 83 when it is not in the big hit game state, a prize ball abnormality notification command is created as an abnormal state and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. (The abnormal state is confirmed based on the input information read out from the input information storage area). Following step S82, command reception processing is performed (step S84). The payout control board 775 transmits a state command such as a state in which the ball payout device 170 does not pay out the game ball due to the ball staking, as will be described in detail later. In the command reception process of step S84, when this status command is normally received, information that informs the payout control board 775 to that effect is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main internal RAM. Although the detailed description thereof will be described later, the normally received status command is shaped and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S84, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is performed (step S86). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and whether or not the detection signal from the second start port sensor 318 is input to the input terminal based on this input information. Determine whether. Based on the determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the values of various counters that update the above-described special symbol hit determination random number, fluctuation pattern determination random number, etc. are extracted and used as starting information. The data is stored in the processing area of the built-in RAM 316. Note that only one start information storage block is provided in this start information storage area, and start information is stored in this start information storage block. This start information corresponds to the special symbol hold, and in this embodiment, the maximum number of special symbols held is “1”. Then, the output of the lighting signal is set so that the number of the start information storage blocks is the holding ball and the special holding ball lamp 322 is turned on, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Then, based on the start information read from the start information storage block to the processing area of the main internal RAM 316, a special symbol hit determination random number value is extracted and stored in the main internal ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not they match (determination as to whether the game is a big win or a small win), and the gaming state determined by these determination results is determined. Based on the above-described determined game state, a special symbol variation pattern or the like is determined based on the above-described special symbol variation pattern determination random number, and a game effect command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Also, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when the big hit gaming state is set, the output of the driving signal to the attacker driving mechanism 339 is set so as to open and close the lower side large winning opening 83, and the output described above as the output information Store in the information storage area. Further, when the small winning game state is entered, the output of the drive signal to the big winning opening / closing mechanism 335 is set so as to open / close the big winning opening 141, and is stored as output information in the above-described output information storage area. Details of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described later.

  Subsequent to step S86, normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing is performed (step S88). Here, in the ordinary electric accessory control process, operation control of the ordinary electric accessory 81 is performed. In this normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not the detection signal from the first start port sensor 317 is input to the input terminal. Determine whether. Based on the determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the values of various counters for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number described above are extracted and used as starting information. Store in the startup information storage area of the built-in RAM. In this start information storage area, start information storage blocks 0 to 3 (four start information storage blocks) are provided, and start information is stored in time series in each start information storage block. Note that each start information corresponds to a normal symbol hold, and in this embodiment, the maximum number of normal symbol holds is “4”. Then, the number of start information storage blocks is set as a holding ball, the output of the lighting signal is set so that the normal holding ball lamp 323 is turned on, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Based on the start information read from the start information storage block 0 to the processing area of the main internal RAM 316, the normal symbol hit determination random number value is extracted and stored in the main internal ROM in advance. Is determined (determination of whether or not the normal hit), and the gaming state determined by these determination results is determined. Based on the above-described determined game state, the normal symbol variation pattern or the like is determined based on the above-described normal symbol variation pattern determination random number, and a game effect command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In addition, according to the game state to be generated, for example, when the normal hit game state is entered, the drive signal to the normal accessory drive mechanism 334 is switched so that the special symbol start port 82 is switched to a mode in which a ball can be entered (allowed ball mode) Is output and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The details of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process will be described later.

  Subsequent to step S88, port output processing is performed (step S90). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 765b, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, an ACK signal is output to the payout control board 775 when the state command from the payout control board 775 is normally received from the output terminal based on the output information, or the lower side big prize opening 83 when it is in the big hit gaming state. A drive signal is output to the attacker drive mechanism 339 that performs the opening / closing operation of the jackpot, or a jackpot signal indicating that the jackpot game state is in effect is output to the external terminal board 371.

  Subsequent to step S90, sub-integrated board command transmission processing is performed (step S92). In the sub-integrated board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763. As described above, the transmission information includes a game effect command, a RAM clear notification command, a test command, a prize ball abnormality notification command, a status command, and the like. In addition to this transmission information, the connection is established when there is a problem in the connection state based on the value of the self-check flag set when the connection state between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775 is confirmed. A failure command is created and transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763.

  Subsequent to step S92, a value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). At this time, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S72. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared. Subsequent to step S94, the register is switched (returned) (step S96). This restoration is performed by reading the contents saved on the stack in step S70 and writing them to the register. Subsequent to step S96, interrupt permission is set (step S98), and this routine is terminated.

<4. Prize ball command and self-check command transmission processing>
Next, prize ball command and self-check command transmission processing will be described. In this prize ball command and self-check command transmission process, a prize ball command for instructing the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball and a self-check for checking the connection state between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775. The command is transmitted to the payout control board 775.

  When the prize ball command and self-check command transmission process is started, the main control MPU 765a of the main control board 765 determines whether or not the self-check flag SCHK-FLG is a value 1 as shown in FIG. Step S100). This self-check flag SCHK-FLG is set when a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775 is generated and transmitted in an ACK signal input determination process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when a self-check command is transmitted and a value of 0 when a self-check command is not transmitted. The self-check flag SCHK-FLG is set to an initial value of 0, that is, a state in which no self-check command is transmitted.

  When the self-check flag SCHK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S100, that is, when no self-check command is transmitted, a problem occurs in the connection state between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775. If not, a prize ball command transmission process is performed (step S102). In this prize ball command transmission process, for example, when one game ball enters the lower large winning opening 83, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 775. When the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 775, the prize ball command is erased. That is, the created prize ball command can be transmitted only once from the main control board 765 (main control MPU 765a) to the payout control board 775, and is discarded after transmission.

  On the other hand, when the self-check flag SCHK-FLG is 1 in step 100, that is, when a self-check command is transmitted, it is assumed that there is a problem in the connection state between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775. The self-check flag SCHK-FLG is set to 0 (step S104), self-check command transmission processing (step S106) is performed, and this routine is terminated. In this self-check command transmission process, a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775 is created and transmitted to the payout control board 775. When the prize ball command transmission process in step S102 and the self-check command transmission process in step S106 are started, the above-described time measurement of the ACK signal input determination time (100 ms in this embodiment) is started.

  By setting the value of the self-check flag SCHK-FLG to the value 0 in step S104 (that is, by setting the value of the self-check flag SCHK-FLGK from the value 1 to the value 0), the self-check command transmitted in step S106 However, when an ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 775 has normally received the self-check command is input in an ACK signal input determination process described later, a prize ball command transmission process is performed in step S102. At this time, in the prize ball command transmission process, if there is a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball, a prize ball command of that number is created and transmitted to the payout control board 775. On the other hand, if the self-check command transmitted in step S106 does not receive an ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 775 has normally received the self-check command in the ACK signal input determination process described later, the self-check command is issued again in step S106. The self-check command is repeatedly transmitted to the payout control board 775 unless the ACK signal is input.

  Thus, the main control board 765 (main control MPU 765a) transmits a prize ball command to the payout control board 775 and transmits a check command to the payout control board 775 when an ACK signal is not input from the payout control board 775. Thereby, for example, it is possible to easily confirm a connection failure such as a cable connector that electrically connects between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775 is disconnected or the cable is disconnected. Can do.

  Further, for example, an illegal board (so-called hanging board) is provided separately from the payout control board 775 so that the ACK signal is not input to the main control board 765, and the player starts the illegal board program by remote control operation. Even if the act is performed, the main control board 765 (main control MPU 765a) transmits a check command to the payout control board 775 instead of retransmitting the prize ball command when the ACK signal is not input. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a player from illegally acquiring a game ball by an illegal act using an illegal board, and to safely check a connection state between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775. it can. A detailed description of the above-described prize ball command and self-check command will be given later.

<5. ACK signal input determination processing>
Next, the ACK signal input determination process will be described. In this ACK signal input determination process, it is determined whether or not the payout control board 775 has normally received a prize ball command or a self-check command.

  When the ACK signal input determination process is started, the main control MPU 765a of the main control board 765 determines whether or not the ACK signal input determination time has elapsed as shown in FIG. 42 (step S110). This determination is performed based on the ACK signal input determination time subtracted in the timer subtraction process in step S76 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Specifically, the ACK signal input determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main internal RAM. In step S110, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether or not the ACK signal input determination time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S110 that the ACK signal input determination time has not elapsed, it is determined whether an ACK signal is input (step S112). This determination is made based on the ACK signal from the payout control board 775 in the switch input process of step S74 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Specifically, the ACK signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main built-in RAM. In step S112, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not an ACK signal is input.

  When an ACK signal is input in step S112, the self-check flag SCHK-FLG is set to 0 (step S114), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when no ACK signal is input in step S112, this routine is terminated as it is. The self-check flag SCHK-FLG is set to a value of 1 when transmitting a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775 and to a value of 0 when not transmitting the self-check command. ing. When the ACK signal is input, the self-check flag SCHK-FLG is set to 0 in step S114, that is, the self-check command is not transmitted. The value of the check flag SCHK-FLG is prevented from changing.

  On the other hand, when the ACK signal input determination time has elapsed in step S110, the self-check flag SCHK-FLGK is set to a value of 1, that is, a state in which a self-check command is transmitted (step S116), and this routine ends. By setting the self-check flag SCHK-FLGK to 1 in step S116, the self-check command transmission process is performed in step S106 in the prize ball command and self-check command transmission process shown in FIG. To the payout control board 775.

<6. Normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing>
Next, the details of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (first game process) will be described. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the first game process, FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the first start detection process, and FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the first lottery / variation start process. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the first lottery variation display pattern setting process, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the first variation process, and FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the first winning combination actuating process. is there.

  In the following, the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process of step S88 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 40 will be described as “first game process”. As shown in FIG. 43, the main control MPU 765a performs, as “first game processing”, first start detection processing (step S8800), first lottery / variation start processing (step S8802), and first lottery variation display pattern setting processing. (Step S8804), the first changing process (Step S8806), and the first winning combination actuating process (Step S8808) are sequentially performed. Details of each process will be described below.

  First, as shown in FIG. 44, when the first start detection process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the first start detection flag is ON (step S8810). The first start detection flag is set to ON by the switch input process (step S74) when the first start port sensor 317 detects that a game ball has entered the normal symbol start port 96. If the first start detection flag is ON (YES in step S8810), it is further determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the usual figure by the first holding means 603 is smaller than 4 (step S8812). If the usual figure reserved ball count is smaller than 4 (YES in step S8812), a first start storage storing process is executed in which the random number extracted by the random number extraction means for normal symbol determination 601 is held in the first hold means 603 ( Step S8814). Specifically, in the first start storage storing process, a normal symbol hit determination random number, a variation pattern determination random number, and the like are stored as start information in the start information storage area for the main map hold in the main internal RAM. Note that after the first start storage storage process (step S8814), the first start detection process is terminated. Further, the first start detection process is also ended when the first start detection flag is OFF (NO in step S8810) or when the general-purpose reserved ball count is 4 or more (NO in step S8812).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 45, when the first lottery / variation start process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the first job flag is “0” (step S8820). The first job flag is a flag for instructing a processing stage relating to a normal symbol. Here, when the symbol variation of the normal symbol is not performed (for example, the state where the demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device 115), the first job flag is set to “0”. If the first job flag is not “0” (NO in step S8820), the other process related to the normal symbol (for example, during the fluctuation of the normal symbol) is being executed, so the first lottery / variation start process Exit.

  If the first job flag is “0” (YES in step S8820), it is further determined whether or not the first hold means 603 has a first start memory (step S8822). If there is a first start memory (YES in step S8822), a first start memory transfer process is executed (step S8824). Specifically, in the first start memory transition process, the start information stored in the general information hold start information storage block 0 is read out and stored in a predetermined processing area. Thereafter, the start information in the start information storage block 1 is in the start information storage block 0, the start information in the start information storage block 2 is in the start information storage block 1, and the start information in the start information storage block 3 is in the start information storage block 2. The start information in the start information storage block 4 is shifted to the start information storage block 3, respectively. If the first start memory is 0 in step S8822 (NO in step S8822), the first lottery / variation start process is terminated.

  After performing the first start memory transition process in step S8824, it is determined whether or not the hit determination random number of the start information stored in the predetermined processing area is the first hit value (step S8826). At this time, if it is the first winning value (YES in step S8826), the first lottery first winning flag is turned ON (step S8828). The first lottery first winning flag is a flag that is set when winning per long. If it is not the first winning value (NO in step S8826), it is determined whether or not the hit determination random number of the start information stored in the predetermined processing area is the second winning value (step S8830). At this time, if it is the second winning value (YES in step S8830), the first lottery second winning flag is turned ON (step S8832). The first lottery second winning flag is a flag that is set when winning in a short win. If neither the first winning value nor the second winning value is obtained (NO in step S8830), neither the first lottery first winning flag nor the first lottery second winning flag is turned ON (it remains OFF). ). Thereafter, “1” is set to the first job flag described above (step S8834), and the first lottery / variation start process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, only 107 types of random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are prepared. And among these hit determination random numbers, 53 types of random number values coincide with the hit determination values (that is, the first hit value and the second hit value) indicating that the win is won, and 54 types of random value Is consistent with the winning judgment value indicating that the game is lost. Further, among the winning determination values indicating that the winning is made in these hits, the two types of random number values coincide with the winning determination values (that is, the first winning value) indicating that the winning has been won per length. The numerical value coincides with the hit determination value (that is, the second hit value) indicating that the short win is won. That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning per short is set much higher than the probability of winning per long.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 46, when the first lottery variation display pattern setting process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the first job flag is “1” (step S8840). If the first job flag is not “1” (NO in step S8840), the first lottery variation display pattern setting process is terminated.

  If the first job flag is “1” (YES in step S8840), it is further determined whether or not the first lottery first winning flag is ON (step S8842). At this time, if the first lottery first winning flag is ON (YES in step S8842), the first lottery first winning hour variation display pattern setting process is executed (step S8844). The first lottery first per hour variation display pattern setting process is a process of setting a variation display pattern corresponding to the lottery result per long.

  If the first lottery first winning flag is not ON (NO in step S8842), it is determined whether or not the first lottery second winning flag is ON (step S8846). At this time, if the first lottery second winning flag is ON (YES in step S8846), the first lottery second winning hour variation display pattern setting process is executed (step S8848). This first lottery second per hour variation display pattern setting process is a process of setting a variation display pattern corresponding to the short lottery result.

  On the other hand, if the first lottery second winning flag is not ON (NO in step S8846), since both the first lottery first winning flag and the first lottery second winning flag are OFF, the first lottery is off A variable display pattern setting process is executed (step S8850). The first lottery variation display pattern setting process is a process of setting a variation display pattern corresponding to a lost lottery result.

  After that, according to the variation pattern set in any of the first lottery first per hour variation display pattern setting process, the first lottery second per hour variation display pattern setting processing and the first lottery variation display pattern setting processing The variation time is set in the timer (step S8852), and the normal LED operation flag is set to ON (step S8854). When the normal LED activation flag is set to ON, symbol variation on the normal symbol display 333 (LED 84) is started. Thereafter, “2” is set in the first job flag (step S8856), and the first lottery variation display pattern setting process is terminated.

  Note that the variation pattern set in the first lottery variation display pattern setting process is transmitted to the sub integrated substrate 763 by the sub integrated substrate command transmission process (step S92) shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 47, when the first changing process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the first job flag is “2” (step S8860). If the first job flag is not “2” (NO in step S8860), the first changing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the first job flag is “2” (YES in step S8860), it is further determined whether or not the variation time set in the timer in step S8852 has expired (step S8862). If the variation time set in the timer has not expired (NO in step S8862), the first variation processing is terminated.

  If the variation time set in the timer has expired (YES in step S8862), the ordinary LED operation flag is set to OFF (step S8864). When the normal symbol LED operation flag is set to OFF, the symbol variation on the normal symbol display 333 (LED 84) is terminated. Then, the symbol change of the normal symbol executed by the sub-integrated board 763 is stopped, and a confirmation stop command for confirming and displaying the lottery result is set on the effect display device 115 (step S8866). This fixed stop command is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763 by the sub-integrated board command transmission process (step S92) shown in FIG.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the first lottery first winning flag or the first lottery second winning flag is ON (step S8868). If the first lottery first winning flag or the first lottery second winning flag is ON (YES in step S8868), “3” is set to the first job flag described above (step S8870), and the first variation is in progress. Processing ends. On the other hand, if neither the first lottery first winning flag nor the first lottery second winning flag is ON (NO in step S8868), the above-described first job flag is set to “0” (step S8872). Then, the first variation process is completed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48, when the first winning combination actuating process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the first job flag is “3” (step S8880). If the first job flag is not “3” (NO in step S8880), the first winning combination actuating process is terminated.

  If the first job flag is “3” (YES in step S8880), it is further determined whether or not the first lottery first winning flag described above is ON (step S8882). At this time, if the first lottery first winning flag is ON (YES in step S8882), the long open time (for example, “5700 ms”) is set as the operation time of the ordinary electric accessory 81 (open time of the special symbol start port 82). ”) Is set in the timer (step S8884).

  Then, a first winning electric role release effect pattern command that is a command for instructing an effect pattern corresponding to the length executed by the sub-integrated board 763 is transmitted (step S8886).

  On the other hand, if the first lottery first winning flag is not ON (NO in step S8882), it means that the first lottery second winning flag is ON. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the special game (short time) is in progress (step S8888). If the special game (short time) is in progress (YES in step S8888), the ordinary electric accessory is in spite of the short win. As the operation time 81 (opening time of the special symbol start opening 82), a long opening time (for example, “5700 ms”) is set in the timer (step S8884), and the first per-electricity opening effect pattern command is set in the same manner as described above. Transmit (step S8886).

  On the other hand, if it is not during the special game (short time) (NO in step S8888), the short opening time (for example, “108 ms”) is set as the timer as the operation time of the ordinary electric accessory 81 (opening time of the special symbol start port 82). (Step S8890). If a short win is won in a state where the special game (time saving) is not in progress, transmission of the first winning combination release effect pattern command as in step S8886 is not performed. That is, even if a short win is won, the effect display device 115 does not display that the short win has been won, and the special symbol start opening 82 is opened only for a short period by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 81. Become.

  Thereafter, the ordinary electric accessory 81 is operated by the ordinary accessory driving mechanism 334 to perform the electric character releasing control for opening the special symbol starting port 82 (step S8882). Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (long open time or short open time) for which the timer is set has elapsed (step S8894). If the timer has passed the predetermined time (YES in step S8884), the ordinary electric accessory 81 is stopped by the ordinary accessory driving mechanism 334, and the electric symbol closing control for closing the special symbol starting port 82 is performed. Thereafter, “0” is set to the above-described first job flag (step S8898), and the first winning combination actuating process is ended. If the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO in step S8894), the process returns to step S8894, and the power release control is executed until the predetermined time elapses.

  48, in practice, the process in the main control board 765 and the process in the sub-integrated board 763 are executed independently according to the timer interrupt in each board. However, in this embodiment, for convenience of explanation and easy understanding, the processing in the main control board 765 and the processing in the sub-integrated board 763 are described as sequential processes that are continuous as a series of processes.

<7. Special design and special electric accessory control processing>
Next, details of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (second game process) will be described. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the second game process, FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the second start detection process, and FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the second lottery / variation start process. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the second lottery variation display pattern setting process, FIG. 53 is a list showing an example of the variation pattern selected in the second variation display pattern setting process, and FIG. 54 is in the second variation. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the second small winning combination actuating processing, and FIG. 56 detects that a game ball has won a special symbol, a big winning opening, and a big winning opening. FIG. 57 is a time chart showing the operation principle of the detection timer of the winning prize sensor, the solenoid, and the rotary sorting device. FIG. A flowchart showing, FIG 58 is a flowchart showing an example of a special electric won game jackpot controlled process.

  In the following, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process in step S86 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 40 will be described as “second game process”. As shown in FIG. 49, the main control MPU 765a performs, as “second game processing”, second start detection processing (step S8600), second lottery / variation start processing (step S8602), and second lottery variation display pattern setting processing. (Step S8604), second variation processing (Step S8606), second small hitting instrument operating process (Step S8608), second big hitting opening process (Step S8610), and special electric bonus hitting control process (Step S8612) ) In order. Details of each process will be described below.

  First, as shown in FIG. 50, when the second start detection process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the second start detection flag is ON (step S8620). Note that the second start detection flag is set to ON by the switch input process (step S74) when the second start port sensor 318 detects that a game ball has entered the special symbol start port 82. If the second start detection flag is ON (YES in step S8620), an illegal winning confirmation process for confirming whether or not the special symbol starting port 82 has been illegally executed is executed (step S8622). For example, in this illegal winning confirmation process, the special symbol start opening 82 is opened by the ordinary electric accessory 81 at a timing that is not the original opening timing of the special symbol start opening 82, or the game ball is played by the second start opening sensor 318. Is detected, processing such as issuing a warning (alert) is performed. And it is discriminate | determined whether the special figure reservation ball number count by the 2nd holding means 613 is smaller than 1 (step S8624). If the special figure reserved ball count is smaller than 1 (YES in step S8624), a second start storage storage process is executed in which the random number extracted by the special symbol per-determination random number extracting means 611 is held in the second holding means 613 ( Step S8626). Specifically, in the second start storage storing process, a special symbol hit determination random number, a variation pattern determination random number, and the like are stored as start information in the start information storage area for the special figure hold in the main built-in RAM. Note that after the second start storage storage process (step S8626) is executed, the second start detection process is terminated. The second start detection process is also ended when the second start detection flag is OFF (NO in step S8620) or when the special figure reservation ball count is 1 or more (NO in step S8624).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51, when the second lottery / variation start process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the second job flag is “0” (step S8630). The second job flag is a flag for instructing a processing stage relating to a special symbol. Here, when the symbol variation of the special symbol is not performed (for example, a state where the demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device 115), the second job flag is set to “0”. If the second job flag is not “0” (NO in step S8630), other processing related to the special symbol (for example, during the variation of the special symbol) is being executed, so the second lottery / variation start processing Exit.

  If the second job flag is “0” (YES in step S8630), it is further determined whether or not there is a second start-up memory in second holding means 613 (step S8632). If there is a second start memory (YES in step S8632), a second start memory transfer process is executed (step S8634). Specifically, in the second start memory transfer process, the start information stored in the start information storage block with special figure hold is read and stored in a predetermined processing area. If the second start memory is 0 in step S8632 (NO in step S8632), the second lottery / variation start process is terminated.

  After performing the second start memory transition process in step S8634, it is determined whether the hit determination random number of the start information stored in the predetermined processing area is a jackpot value (step S8636). At this time, if it is a jackpot value (YES in step S8636), the second jackpot flag is turned ON (step S8638). The second jackpot flag is a flag that is set when the jackpot is won. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit value (NO in step S8636), it is determined whether or not the hit determination random number is a small hit value (step S8640). At this time, if it is a small hit value (YES in step S8640), the second small hit flag is turned ON (step S8642). The second small hit flag is a flag that is set when a small hit is won. If neither the big hit value nor the small hit value is found (NO in step S8640), neither the second big hit flag nor the second small hit flag is turned ON (it remains OFF). Thereafter, “1” is set in the second job flag described above (step S8644), and the second lottery / variation start process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, only 337 types of special design hit determination random numbers are prepared. Of these winning determination random numbers, the two types of random number values match the winning determination value (that is, the jackpot value) indicating that the jackpot value is won, and 333 types of random number values are won in the jackpot number. Matches the hit determination value (that is, the small hit value), and matches the hit determination value indicating that the two types of random numbers are lost (losing). In other words, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is set much higher than the probability of winning the jackpot. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a random number value for losing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 52, when the second lottery variation display pattern setting process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the second job flag is “1” (step S8650). If the second job flag is not “1” (NO in step S8650), the second lottery variation display pattern setting process is terminated.

  If the second job flag is “1” (YES in step S8650), it is further determined whether or not the aforementioned second jackpot flag is ON (step S8652). At this time, if the second jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S8652), the second lottery jackpot hour variation display pattern which is a variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot lottery result is selected (step S8654). Specifically, one of the tables 7 to 9 of the variation pattern list to be described later is selected and determined. In step S8654, the stop (lighting) mode of the special symbol display 332 (LED 87) is also determined.

  If the second big hit flag is not ON (NO in step S8652), it is further determined whether or not the second small hit flag is ON (step S8656). At this time, if the second small hit flag is ON (YES in step S8656), a second lottery small hit variation display pattern that is a variation pattern corresponding to the small lottery result is selected (step S8658). Specifically, one of the tables 4 to 6 of the variation pattern list to be described later is selected and determined. In step S8656, the stop (lighting) mode of special symbol display 332 (LED 87) is also determined.

  On the other hand, if the second small hit flag is not ON (NO in step S8856), since both the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag are OFF, the variation pattern corresponding to the losing lottery result. 2. A variation display pattern is selected when the lottery is off (step S8660). Specifically, any one of the tables 1 to 43 of the variation pattern list to be described later is selected and determined. In step S8660, the stop (lighting) mode of special symbol display 332 (LED 87) is also determined.

  After that, any one of the second lottery big change display pattern, the second lottery small change display pattern, and the second lottery change display pattern is selected as the winning information command (ie, the big win) , A command indicating either a small hit or a miss) (step S8662). Furthermore, a variation time corresponding to the set variation pattern is selected from the second lottery big hit time fluctuation display pattern, the second lottery small hit hour fluctuation display pattern and the second lottery fluctuation display pattern. The special figure LED operation flag is set to ON (step S8666). When the special symbol LED operation flag is set to ON, the symbol variation in the special symbol indicator 332 (LED 87) is started. Thereafter, “2” is set in the second job flag described above (step S8668), and the second lottery variation display pattern setting process is terminated.

  By the way, the variation pattern set in the second lottery variation display pattern setting process is transmitted to the sub integrated substrate 763 by the sub integrated substrate command transmission process (step S92) shown in FIG.

  Here, a list of variation patterns will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the second jackpot flag is ON, Table 7 and Table 8 are selected and determined at a ratio of 30%, and Table 9 is selected and determined at a ratio of 40%. When the table 7 is selected and determined, the music A is output, when the table 8 is selected and determined, the music B is output, and when the table 9 is selected and determined, the music C is output. In any of the tables 7, 8 and 9, the display pattern is selected and determined as any one of the display patterns of “a jackpot display after being paused at“ prelude ”” and “a jackpot display after singing”. However, these display patterns all store five display patterns. In other words, the display pattern is selected and determined from any of 10 display patterns in total, including 5 patterns of “Pre-play after a pause and a jackpot display” and 5 patterns of “Big jackpot display after singing”. The

  When both the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag are OFF, Table 1 and Table 2 are selected and determined at a ratio of 40%, and Table 3 is selected and determined at a ratio of 20%. When table 1 is selected and determined, song A is output, when table 2 is selected and determined, song B is output, and when table 3 is selected and determined, song C is output. In Table 1, Table 2, and Table 3, any of the five display patterns “Stop at Prelude” is selected and determined.

  When the second small hit flag is ON, Table 4 and Table 5 are selected and determined at a ratio of 40%, and Table 6 is selected and determined at a ratio of 20%. When the table 4 is selected and determined, the music A is output, when the table 5 is selected and determined, the music B is output, and when the table 6 is selected and determined, the music C is output.

  In each of the tables 4, 5 and 6, "stop at" first phrase "", "stop at" second phrase "" and "stop at" third phrase "" are 50 respectively. One of the display patterns is selected and determined at a ratio of%, 30%, and 20%. Here, each musical piece proceeds in the order of the first phrase, the second phrase, and the third phrase. That is, when the display pattern “Stop at“ 2nd Phrase ”” is selected and decided, after passing through the 1st phrase, it reaches the 2nd phrase and stops changing the special symbol, and “Stop at“ 3rd Phrase ”” When the display pattern is selected and determined, after passing through the first phrase and the second phrase, the third phrase is reached and the variation of the special symbol is stopped. On the contrary, when the display pattern of “stop at“ first phrase ”” is selected and determined, the variation of the special symbol is stopped at the first phrase without reaching the second phrase and the third phrase. When the display pattern of “stop at“ second phrase ”” is selected and determined, the variation of the special symbol is stopped at the second phrase without reaching the third phrase though passing through the first phrase. Therefore, among “Stop at“ First Phrase ””, “Stop at“ Second Phrase ”” and “Stop at“ Third Phrase ””, the shortest change time of the special symbol is ““ First Phrase ” The display pattern of “Stop at“ 3 ”is the display pattern of“ Stop at “3rd phrase” ”having the longest variation time of the special symbol.

  In this way, “Stop at“ First Phrase ””, “Stop at“ Second Phrase ”” and “Stop at“ Third Phrase ”” at the ratio of 50%, 30% and 20% respectively. The display pattern is selected and determined in consideration of minimizing the variation time of the special symbol at the time of a small hit. In other words, if the change display of the special symbol is performed for a long time every time a small hit, the rotation efficiency of the gaming machine (the number of changes per unit time) decreases, so the display pattern of “stop at“ first phrase ”” The ratio that is selected and determined is the highest, and the ratio that is selected and determined for the display pattern of “stop at“ third phrase ”” is the lowest. In addition, the ratios selected and determined as “stop at“ first phrase ””, “stop at“ second phrase ”” and “stop at“ third phrase ”” are 50%, 30% and It is not limited to 20%, and may be 50%, 33% and 17%, for example. However, if the difference between the ratio selected and determined for the display pattern “stop at“ first phrase ”” and the ratio selected and determined for the display pattern “stop at“ third phrase ”” is significant, The rate of proceeding to the step ahead of the first phrase is low, and the player's willingness to play is rejected and declined. Therefore, the ratio that is selected and selected as “Stop at“ First Phrase ””, “Stop at“ Second Phrase ”” or “Stop at“ Third Phrase ”” is “Stop at“ First Phrase ”” ”Is the highest ratio selected and determined for the display pattern, and the lowest ratio is selected and determined for the“ stop at the third phrase ”display pattern, and the difference is about 10 to 30%. It is preferable.

  Each of the display patterns “stop at“ first phrase ””, “stop at“ second phrase ”” and “stop at“ third phrase ”” stores 10 display patterns. In other words, a total of 30 display patterns including 10 patterns “stop at“ first phrase ””, 10 patterns “stop at“ second phrase ”” and 10 patterns “stop at“ third phrase ””. One of the display patterns is selected and determined.

  In Table 4, Table 5, and Table 6, 10 patterns of “stop at“ first phrase ”” have different special symbol variation times. Similarly, 10 patterns of “stop at“ second phrase ”” and 10 patterns of “stop at“ third phrase ”” have different variation times of special symbols. In addition, the display patterns of 10 patterns each having a different variation time of the special symbol coincide with the reciprocal of the theoretical probability of entering the specific area 343 formed in the rotary sorter 294. One of the 10 display patterns corresponds to the specific area 343. In other words, among the ten display patterns, any one of the specific areas 343 can be used for the rotary vibration between the time difference between the display pattern having the smallest variation time of the special symbol and the display pattern having the largest variation time of the special symbol. The rotary sorter 294 rotates to the normal area 344 immediately before the next specific area 343 in the rotation direction of the distribution device 294. In other words, the rotation of the rotary sorter 294 causes any one specific region 343 to pass through the inflow port 347 and then the normal region 344 immediately before the next specific region 343 passes through the inflow port 347. The time until is equivalent to the time of the difference between the display pattern with the shortest variation time of the special symbol and the display pattern with the longest variation time of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, since the phase difference between each specific region 343 is 120 °, the rotation is performed between the time of the difference between the display pattern having the smallest variation time of the special symbol and the display pattern having the largest variation time of the special symbol. The type sorter 294 will rotate 120 °.

  More specifically, in Table 4, the display pattern of “stop at“ first phrase ”” is 10 patterns of special symbol fluctuation times of 10,000 ms, 10400 ms, 10800 ms, 11200 ms, 11600 ms, 12000 ms, 12400 ms, 12800 ms, 13200 ms and 13600 ms. It is. In addition, the display pattern of “stop at“ second phrase ”” is 10 patterns with a special symbol variation time of 16000 ms, 16400 ms, 16800 ms, 17200 ms, 17600 ms, 18000 ms, 18400 ms, 18800 ms, 19200 ms and 19600 ms. The display pattern of “stop at“ third phrase ”” is 10 patterns with a special symbol variation time of 22000 ms, 22400 ms, 22800 ms, 23200 ms, 23600 ms, 24000 ms, 24400 ms, 24800 ms, 25200 ms and 25600 ms.

  In Table 5, the display pattern of “stop at“ first phrase ”” is 10 patterns of special symbol fluctuation times of 10500 ms, 10900 ms, 11300 ms, 11700 ms, 12100 ms, 12,500 ms, 12900 ms, 13300 ms, 13700 ms and 14100 ms. . In addition, the display pattern of “stop at“ second phrase ”” includes ten patterns of special symbol fluctuation times of 16500 ms, 16900 ms, 17300 ms, 17700 ms, 18100 ms, 18500 ms, 18900 ms, 19300 ms, 19700 ms and 20100 ms. The display pattern of “stop at“ third phrase ”” is 10 patterns of special symbol fluctuation times of 22500 ms, 22900 ms, 23300 ms, 23700 ms, 24100 ms, 24500 ms, 24900 ms, 25300 ms, 25700 ms and 26100 ms.

  Furthermore, in Table 6, the display pattern of “stop at“ first phrase ”” is 10 patterns of special symbol fluctuation times of 11000 ms, 11400 ms, 11800 ms, 12200 ms, 12600 ms, 13000 ms, 13400 ms, 13800 ms, 14200 ms, and 14600 ms. . In addition, the display pattern of “stop at“ second phrase ”” includes 10 patterns of special symbol fluctuation times of 17000 ms, 17400 ms, 17800 ms, 18200 ms, 18600 ms, 19000 ms, 19400 ms, 19800 ms, 20200 ms and 20600 ms. The display patterns of “stop at“ third phrase ”” are 10 patterns of special symbol fluctuation times of 23000 ms, 23400 ms, 23800 ms, 24200 ms, 24600 ms, 25000 ms, 25400 ms, 25800 ms, 26200 ms, and 26600 ms.

  As described above, in any of the tables 4 to 6 and in any display pattern, the time difference between the display pattern with the smallest variation time of the special symbol and the display pattern with the largest variation time of the special symbol is 3600 ms. It becomes. In the rotary sorter 294, any one specific region 343 always passes through the inflow port 347 (see FIG. 24) during this 3600 ms. Moreover, even if any display pattern is selected and determined, there are 10 display patterns that are the same number as the inverse of the theoretical probability of entering the specific area 343. Of these, the variation time of any one pattern is always The specific area 343 is set so as to pass through the inflow port 347. Further, the game ball held in the carry-in piece 341 is raised to the inflow port 347 (that is, the carry-in piece 341 is moved from the receiving position to the throw-in position). After a certain period of time. Therefore, the theoretical probability of entering the specific area 343 is always 1/10 regardless of the winning timing at the special symbol starting port 82.

  In order for the theoretical probability of entering the specific area 343 to be always 1/10 regardless of the winning timing at the special symbol starting port 82, the reciprocal of the theoretical probability of entering the specific area 343 is used. And the number of display patterns to be selected and determined need not be the same number, and the number of display patterns to be selected and determined may be an integer multiple of the reciprocal of the theoretical probability of entering the specific area 343. In addition, the game ball held in the carry-in piece 341 is raised to the inflow port 347 not only after a certain period of time has elapsed since the grand prize opening 141 is opened, but the big prize opening 141 is closed. It may be after a certain period of time.

  Here, the theory that the theoretical probability of entering the specific area 343 is always constant (1/10 in the present embodiment) regardless of the winning timing at the special symbol start opening 82 will be described.

  According to the present embodiment, the specific area 343 of the rotary sorter 294 is shifted every fixed time (4000 ms in the present embodiment) (that is, the winning timing is shifted every fixed time). In addition, this fixed time includes the number of effect images (10 in the present embodiment) and the difference in effect time of each effect image (corresponding to the predetermined time of the present invention, 400 ms in the present embodiment). Corresponds to the multiplied value. The specific time as the winning timing (the time when the game ball guided to the rotary sorting device 294 can enter the specific area 343 when the timing of one winning is lost, and in this embodiment is 400 ms) It becomes substantially the same time as the difference in the production time of each production image. When expressed by a mathematical formula, a certain time is T [ms], the number of effect images is N [number], a predetermined time is Δs [ms], a specific time is t [ms], and the number of winning effect images is n. In this case, it is a requirement that both the expressions “T × α≈N × Δs” and “t × α≈n × Δs” are satisfied. However, α is a constant (integer), and when n = 1 as in this embodiment, α = 1.

  When both the above formulas are established, a value obtained by dividing n (1 in the present embodiment), which is the number of winning effect images, by the number N of a plurality of effect images (1/10 in the present embodiment), and a certain time The ratio of the specific time t to T (1/10 in this embodiment) is the same time. As a result, any effect image (the effect image at the winning timing) of the plurality of effect images is selected unless the effect image selection determining means (step S8604) selects and decides the image so that it is intentionally biased to any effect image. In this embodiment, only when a single effect image) is selected and determined, one game ball out of the game balls received from the opening / closing device (big prize opening unit 146) is mechanical at the winning timing. It will be guided to the lottery device (rotary sorting device 294). That is, the relational expression “n / N = t / T” (n = 1 in the present embodiment) is established, and the theoretical entry to the specific area 343 regardless of the winning timing at the special symbol starting port 82. Probability is always constant, making it impossible to hit the winning timing.

  Therefore, regardless of the timing of accepting the game ball to the special symbol start opening 82, the ratio of the winning effect image n to the plurality of effect images N (1/10 in the present embodiment) and the specific time t for a certain time T Ratio (1/10 in this embodiment) is substantially the same. Therefore, since the probability that a special game will occur does not change depending on the skill of the player, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that ensures fairness for any player. That is, it is not possible to aim at a timing at which the game ball received from the opening / closing device is easily guided to the rotary sorter 294. Note that “substantially the same” means that it is sufficient that the probability of occurrence of a special game varies depending on the skill of the player, but it is preferable that they are almost the same.

  By the way, in this embodiment, although the specific area | region 343 of the rotary distribution apparatus 294 shifts every fixed time (namely, winning timing shifts every fixed time), it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, even if the rotary sorter 294 operates in a regular cycle at regular intervals and the winning timing is shifted at least once within one cycle of the cycle, if the following conditions are satisfied, The theoretical probability of entering the specific area 343 is always constant.

  When the rotary sorter 294 operates in a regular cycle every fixed time and the winning timing is stopped at least once within one cycle of the cycle, the theoretical probability of entering the specific area 343 is always In order to be constant, the following conditions must be satisfied. As the condition, a certain time required for one cycle corresponds to an integral multiple of a value obtained by multiplying the number of the plurality of effect images and the difference in the effect time of each effect image (corresponding to the predetermined time of the present invention). And the sum of the specific times within one cycle (that is, the sum of the specific times at each of the winning timings within one cycle) is an integer multiple of the value obtained by multiplying the number of winning effect images and the predetermined time. This is true. If this condition is satisfied, regardless of the timing of accepting the game ball to the special symbol start opening 82, the ratio of the winning effect image to the plurality of effect images and the specific time that falls within one period relative to a certain time required for one period The ratio of the sum is almost the same. For example, if a certain period of time required for one cycle is 8000 ms, the number of effect images is 20, the predetermined time is 400 ms, and the number of winning effect images is two, the total of the specific times within one cycle is 800 ms. When expressed by a mathematical expression, a certain time is T [ms], the number of effect images is N [pieces], a predetermined time is Δs [ms], a total of specific times within one period is Σt [ms], and the winning effect image It is a requirement that both the formulas “T≈N × Δs × α” and “Σt≈n × Δs × α” are satisfied. Here, α is a constant (integer).

  When both the above formulas are established, a value (for example, 1/10) obtained by dividing n [number], which is the number of winning effect images, by N [number], which is the number of a plurality of effect images, and one for a certain time. The ratio (for example, 1/10) of the total sum of specific times within the period is the same value. As a result, unless an effect image selection determining unit (step S8604) intentionally biases to an arbitrary effect image, any winning effect image is selected and determined from among the plurality of effect images. Only one of the game balls received from the opening / closing device (big prize opening unit 146) is guided to the mechanical lottery device (rotary sorting device 294) at the winning timing. In other words, the relational expression “n / N = Σt / T” is established, and the theoretical probability of entering the specific area 343 is always constant regardless of the winning timing at the special symbol starting port 82, and the winning timing is It becomes impossible to aim.

  In any of the tables 4 to 6, it takes 6000 ms from the first phrase to the second phrase. Furthermore, the specific areas 343 are provided at intervals of 120 °, and the rotational speed of the rotary sorter 294 is 3600 ms / 120 °. Here, the carry-in piece 341 is moved from the acceptance position to the insertion position because a fixed time has elapsed since the big prize opening 141 is always opened regardless of the display pattern. Even if it is the timing to enter the area 344, it may be the timing to enter the specific area 343 by proceeding to the second phrase. For example, the time from the end of the first phrase to the end of the second phrase is the same as the time from one specific area 343 to the next specific area 343 in the rotation direction of the rotary sorter 294. If it is the timing to enter the normal area 344 (does not enter the specific area 343) if it is temporarily stopped at the first phrase, it is assumed that the player has advanced to the second phrase without stopping at the first phrase. However, stopping at the second phrase is the timing for entering the normal area 344 (not entering the specific area 343). Therefore, the time from the end of the first phrase to the end of the second phrase is different from the time from the one specific area 343 to the next specific area 343 in the rotation direction of the rotary sorter 294. By doing so, the timing at which the carry-in piece 341 is moved from the receiving position to the loading position can be changed depending on whether the fluctuation is stopped in the first phrase or in the second phrase. As a result, if it stops at the first phrase, even if it is the timing to enter the normal area 344 and the change time becomes long without stopping at the first phrase, the change time is long. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by giving the player a sense of expectation to enter the specific area 343. In addition, depending on which rotational position the specific area 343 is in when the special winning opening 141 is opened, it is predicted which game ball may enter the specific area 343 if the fluctuation stops at which phrase. Enjoyment can be increased and the decline of interest can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the time from the start of the change of the special symbol to the end of the first phrase, the time from the one specific region 343 to the next specific region 343 in the rotation direction of the rotary sorter 294, Is also different. Furthermore, the time from the end of the second phrase to the end of the third phrase is also different from the time from one specific area 343 to the next specific area 343 in the rotation direction of the rotary sorter 294. ing. As a result, if it stops at either the first phrase or the second phrase, even if it is the timing to enter the normal area 344, not only will the fluctuation time become longer, but also if it stops at the third phrase By giving the player a sense of expectation to enter the specific area 343, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  By the way, as described above, in order to increase the rotation efficiency of the gaming machine, when the ratio that is selected and determined for the display pattern of “stop at“ first phrase ”” is the highest, the variation of the special symbol is the first phrase. There is a possibility that the probability of theoretically entering the specific area 343 can be increased by allowing the special symbol starting port 82 to win a game ball on the assumption that it stops. More specifically, when the big hit determination process in step S203 of FIG. 39 is a small hit, the time from when the big winning opening 141 is opened until the game ball held in the carry-in piece 341 is raised to the inflow port 347 Is constant. Therefore, if the time from when the game ball is won to the special symbol starting port 82 until the special winning port 141 is released is assumed to be constant, it is assumed that the variation of the special symbol stops at the first phrase. When the game ball is awarded to the special symbol start port 82 so that the timing at which the game ball passes through the inlet 347 and the timing at which the game ball held in the carry-in piece 341 is raised to the inlet 347 are matched, The theoretical entrance probability to 343 can be increased. However, in this embodiment, each of the display patterns “stop at“ first phrase ””, “stop at“ second phrase ”” and “stop at“ third phrase ”” has a special symbol change time. Ten different display patterns are stored. That is, the time from when the game ball wins the special symbol start opening 82 until the special winning opening 141 is released differs depending on the display pattern selected and determined. Further, the reciprocal of the theoretical probability of entering the specific area 343 when the rotational speed of the rotary sorter 294 is constant is the same as the number of display patterns having different variation times. The variation time of any one of the ten display patterns is the timing at which the specific area 343 passes the inlet 347 and the game ball held in the carry-in piece 341 rises to the inlet 347. Is set so as to match the timing of the game, so the theoretical probability of entering the specific area 343 is always a fixed 10 minutes regardless of the winning timing of the game ball to the special symbol starting port 82 1 Thus, regardless of the skill of the player, the theoretical probability of entering the specific area 343 does not change regardless of who plays the game.

  By the way, conventionally, when a game ball is received from a predetermined opening / closing device, for example, the game ball rolls around a plurality of selection openings formed inside the rotary type accessory, and the game ball is specified. In general, a mechanical lottery process is performed to determine whether or not a winning entry is accepted. In such a conventional gaming machine, it is very difficult to predict a lottery result until a game ball is actually received in one of the selection ports. Conversely, a player wins a mechanical lottery. The pleasure of predicting whether or not was completely undermined.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, the game ball won in the special winning opening 141 is once held by the carry-in piece 341 and then inserted into the rotary sorter 294 at a predetermined timing to perform mechanical lottery. Therefore, it is possible to predict to some extent in advance whether or not the game balls are distributed to the specific area 343 depending on the timing at which the game balls are thrown in by the carry-in piece 341 without the game balls rotating unnecessarily during the mechanical lottery. It is. In other words, the player not only has the pleasure of predicting the winning of the mechanical lottery, but can get more excitement and joy when the prediction is a winning. In addition, since the timing at which the game ball is inserted by the carry-in piece 341 is always after a certain period of time has elapsed since the opening / closing device is in the open state, there is a suspicion that an operation that was disadvantageous to the player was made intentionally. I don't embrace.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine, an image effect is executed by the effect display device 115 based on a winning at the special symbol start opening 82, and when the mechanical lottery process is performed in parallel, the mechanical lottery is performed. The player's interest is concentrated only on the movement of the game ball used in the game, and the image production on the production display device 115 is meaningless. However, in the present embodiment, the time from when a game ball is won to the big prize opening 141 until it is assigned to any area by the rotary sorter 294 is the same as that for a conventional game machine. It is much shorter than the time it takes to be assigned to one of the selection openings with a rotary type character after being accepted. That is, in this embodiment, when the mechanical lottery is performed, the movement of the game ball is not interesting, but the game ball received from the opening / closing device is merely rolled to the mechanical lottery device. . Therefore, even if the image effect and the mechanical lottery on the effect display device 115 are executed at the same time, it is possible to afford time enough to watch the image effect and the movement of the game ball at different timings. The image production at 115 does not become meaningless, and the player can enjoy the mechanical lottery with peace of mind.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54, when the second changing process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the second job flag is “2” (step S8670). If the second job flag is not “2” (NO in step S 8670), the second changing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second job flag is “2” (YES in step S 8670), it is further determined whether or not the variation time set in the timer in step S 8660 has expired (step S 8672). If the variation time set in the timer is not up (NO in step S8672), the second variation processing is terminated.

  If the variation time set in the timer has expired (YES in step S8672), the special figure LED operation flag is set to OFF (step S8674). When the special symbol LED operation flag is set to OFF, the symbol variation on the special symbol indicator 332 (LED 87) is terminated. Then, the symbol variation of the special symbol executed by the sub-integrated board 763 is stopped, and a confirmation stop command (deleting a specific example) for confirming and displaying the lottery result is set on the effect display device 115 (step S8676). This fixed stop command is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763 by the sub-integrated board command transmission process (step S92) shown in FIG.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the second jackpot flag is ON (step S8678). If the second jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S 8678), “4” is set to the second job flag described above (step S 8680), and the second changing process ends. On the other hand, if the second big hit flag is not ON (NO in step S8678), it is determined whether or not the second big hit flag is ON (step S8682). If the second small hit flag is ON (YES in step S8682), “3” is set to the above-mentioned second job flag (step S8864), and the second changing process ends. On the other hand, if neither the second big hit flag nor the second small hit flag is ON (NO in step S8682), “0” is set to the above-described second job flag (step S8866), and the second variable processing Ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55, when the second small winning combination actuating process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the second job flag is “3” (step S8690). If the second job flag is not “3” (NO in step S 8690), the second small hitting tool operating process is terminated.

  If the second job flag is “3” (YES in step S 8690), a second small hit release effect pattern command which is a command for instructing an effect pattern corresponding to the small hit executed by the sub-integrated board 763 is transmitted. (Step S8692). Specifically, the sub-integrated board 763, which has transmitted the second small hitting opening effect pattern command and received the command, displays an effect pattern on the effect display device 115 that makes the player aim for the grand prize winning opening 141. Details will be described later.

  Then, the operation time of the movable piece 142 (the opening time of the big prize opening 141) is set in a timer (the second small hit opening first timer is set) (step S8694), and the movable piece 142 is moved by the big prize opening opening / closing mechanism 335. Is operated to perform the opening operation of the special winning opening 141, and the special electric accessory opening control is performed (step S8696). Then, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won in the center accessory 91 based on whether or not a game ball is detected by the prize opening sensor 330 (step S8698). When winning in the center bonus 91 (YES in step S8698), a bonus input signal indicating winning in the center bonus 91 is output to the sub-integrated board 763 (step S8700). Based on the accessory input signal, a predetermined effect operation is performed in the effect display device 115 or the like.

  Then, a timer that counts the elapsed time since the game ball has won the grand prize opening 141 is set (the second timer is set to open the second small hit) (step S8702), and the big prize opening 141 is open. It is determined whether or not the movable piece 142 is in an open state (step S8704). If the special winning opening 141 is being opened (YES in step S8704), it is determined whether or not the second small hit opening first timer has passed a predetermined time (step S8706). If the second small hitting opening first timer has elapsed (YES in step S8706), the special winning opening / closing mechanism 335 causes the movable piece 142 to operate, and the special winning opening 141 is closed. The accessory closing control is performed (step S8708).

  After the execution of the upper special electric accessory closing control (step S8708), the special winning opening 141 is not being opened (NO in step S8704), or the second small hit opening second timer has not passed the predetermined time. (NO in step S8706), it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the V winning sensor 331 (that is, the V winning sensor 331 is ON) (step S8710). If the V winning sensor 331 is ON (YES in step S8710), an in-function specific detection signal indicating that a game ball has won in the specific area 343 in the center bonus 91 is output to the sub-integrated board 763 (step S8710). In step S8712), the sub-integrated board 763 performs a predetermined effect operation in the effect display device 115 or the like based on the in-object specific detection signal. Then, the second small hit game big hit flag is turned ON (step S8714), the above-mentioned second job flag is set to “4” (step S8682), and the second small hit bonus item operating process is ended. The second jackpot game jackpot flag is a flag that is set when a jackpot is won via the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, if the V winning sensor 331 is not ON (NO in step S8710), it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the discharge sensor 313 (that is, the discharge sensor 313 is ON) (step S8718). If the discharge sensor 313 is not ON (NO in step S8718), it is further determined whether or not the second small hit opening second timer has elapsed a predetermined time (here, 20 seconds) (step S8720). If the second small hit release second timer has passed the predetermined time (YES in step S8720), since the elapsed time after winning the big prize opening 141 has passed 20 seconds, a discharge detection signal described later is output. In step S8722, “0” is set in the above-described second job flag (step S8726), and the second small winning combination actuating process is terminated. As a result, when 20 seconds elapse after the game ball wins the specific area 343 (that is, V win), the process proceeds to the next process regardless of whether or not the game ball remains in the center accessory 91. Is possible. If the second small hit release second timer has not passed the predetermined time (NO in step S8720), the process returns to step S8704.

  On the other hand, if the discharge sensor 313 is ON (YES in step S8718), it means that the game ball has won the normal area 344 in the center accessory 91. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the number of detections (winning number) by the winning mouth sensor 330 and the number of detections (discharge number) by the discharge sensor 313 are the same. (Step S8724). If the number of winnings and the number of discharges are the same (YES in step S8724), a discharge detection signal indicating that the game balls have been discharged from the center accessory 91 is output to the sub-integrated board 763 (step S8722). ), The sub-integrated board 763 performs a predetermined effect operation in the effect display device 115 or the like based on the discharge detection signal. Then, “0” is set to the above-described second job flag (step S8726), and the second small winning combination actuating process is ended. On the other hand, if the number of winnings and the number of discharges are not the same (NO in step S8724), it indicates that the game balls have not been discharged from the center accessory 91, and the process returns to step S8704.

  If no prize has been won in the center combination 91 (NO in step S8698), it is determined whether or not the second small hit opening first timer has passed a predetermined time (step S8728). If the second small hit opening first timer has elapsed (YES in step S8728), the top special electric accessory closing control is performed in the same manner as described above to close the special winning opening 141 (step S8729). On the other hand, if the second small hit release second timer has not passed the predetermined time (NO in step S8706), the process returns to step S8698.

  Here, the operation principle at the time of small hit will be described based on FIG.

  When the variation of the special symbol is stopped when the second small hit flag is ON, after a time interval of 1000 ms, the large winning opening 141 is opened, the detection timer of the winning opening sensor 330 is activated, and the solenoid 400 is turned ON. . As a result, when a game ball wins the big winning opening 141, the winning opening is detected by the winning opening sensor 330, and the carry-in piece 341 is changed from the input position to the receiving position. It should be noted that the detection timer is activated when the grand prize opening 141 is opened when the game ball is forcibly awarded to the grand prize opening 141 due to fraud etc. even though the big prize opening 141 is not open. This is to prevent detection. The reason why the solenoid 400 is turned ON when the special winning opening 141 is opened is to extend the life of the solenoid 400 by shortening the energization time. Accordingly, the carry-in piece 341 is always in the loading position, and becomes the receiving position after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the special winning opening 141 is opened.

  The big winning opening 141 is opened for a maximum of 1600 ms, for example, but is closed when a winning of a game ball is detected by the winning opening sensor 330 during the opening. Note that the winning opening sensor 330 is provided in the middle of the guide passage 340, and a predetermined time is required until the game ball reaches the winning opening sensor 330 after winning the winning ball 141. Therefore, the operation time of the detection timer of the winning a prize opening sensor 330 is set longer than the opening time of the special winning opening 141. In the present embodiment, the operating time of the detection timer of the winning opening sensor 330 is set to 3100 ms after the large winning opening 141 is opened. The grand prize opening 141 is closed when one game ball is won, but it takes a predetermined time from the game ball winning the big prize opening 141 to the prize opening sensor 330. May win 2-3 balls. However, only one game ball can be held in the carry-in piece 341, and the second and subsequent game balls are discharged from the discharge port 348 when the carry-in piece 341 reaches the input position. Further, the solenoid 400 turns from ON to OFF after 3600 ms has elapsed since the special winning opening 141 is opened. As a result, the carry-in piece 341 changes from the receiving position to the throw-in position, and the game ball held in the carry-in piece 341 reaches the inflow port 347 and enters either the specific area 343 or the normal area 344. The reason that the time during which the solenoid 400 is ON is longer than the operation time of the detection timer of the winning port sensor 330 is that the game ball detected by the winning port sensor 330 is discharged from the outlet 348 without reaching the inlet 347. This is to prevent this from happening. As described above, the game ball won in the special winning opening 141 surely reaches the inflow port 347, and always enters either the specific area 343 or the normal area 344.

  By the way, the solenoid 400 is turned from ON to OFF after a certain time of 3600 ms has passed since the special winning opening 141 is opened, which is unchanged. However, the timing at which a game ball wins a prize winning opening 141 is different each time. Accordingly, the timing at which the player wins the game ball at the big prize opening 141 even though the time from when the big prize opening 141 is opened until the carry-in piece 341 is displaced from the acceptance position to the insertion position is constant. May cause an illusion that the user can enter the specific area 343. This is because the time from when the game ball is won to the prize winning opening 141 (after the prize winning opening 141 is closed) until the carry-in piece 341 is displaced from the receiving position to the loading position is different each time. It is. That is, whether or not to enter the specific area 343 is determined by a special symbol variation time that is not selectable and determined by the player, but the player can enter the big prize opening 141. The illusion is that there is a possibility of entering the specific area 343 depending on the timing of the movement. This is caused by closing the special winning opening 141 when the winning opening sensor 330 detects that one game ball has won the special winning opening 141.

  Note that the timing at which the solenoid 400 is turned from ON to OFF (that is, the timing at which the carry-in piece 341 is displaced from the receiving position to the inserting position) is not limited to a certain time after the special winning opening 141 is opened. For example, the solenoid 400 may be turned from ON to OFF after a certain period of time has elapsed since the change of the special symbol has stopped, or after a certain period of time has elapsed since the operation of the detection timer of the winning prize sensor 330 has stopped. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57, when the second big hit opening process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the second job flag is “4” (step S8730). If the second job flag is not “4” (NO in step S8730), the second jackpot opening process is terminated.

  If the second job flag is “4” (YES in step S8730), it is determined whether or not the second jackpot flag is ON (step S8732). Here, if the second jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S8732), it indicates that the jackpot has been won by a combination of special symbols, so an effect pattern corresponding to the jackpot start round executed by the sub-integrated board 763 The second jackpot opening command which is a command for instructing is set (step S8734). Specifically, the second integrated jackpot opening command is transmitted, and the sub-integrated board 763 that has received the command displays an effect pattern for starting the jackpot game on the effect display device 115. Then, a second jackpot opening timer for counting the execution time of the jackpot game start round is set (step S8736), and “1” of the jackpot game start round is set in the round counter (step S8738). Then, “5” is set in the second job flag described above (step S8740), and the second big hit opening process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the second jackpot flag is not ON (NO in step S8732), it indicates that the jackpot has been won by passing through the specific area 343, and therefore, the big hit start round via the jackpot executed by the sub-integrated board 763 A second small hit game big hit opening command, which is a command for designating an effect pattern corresponding to, is set (step S8742). Specifically, the sub-integrated board 763 that receives the command as a second small hit game jackpot opening command sends a presentation pattern for starting the big hit game in a different manner from the big jackpot by combining special symbols. It is displayed on the display device 115. Then, the second small hit game big hit opening timer for counting the execution time of the big hit game start round is set (step S8744), and “2” of the big hit game start round is set in the round counter (step S8746). This is because “1” in the big hit game start round is considered to have already been executed by the opening operation of the big winning opening 141 in the small hit game. Then, “5” is set in the second job flag described above (step S8740), and the second big hit opening process is terminated.

  The effect patterns (second jackpot opening command and second jackpot gaming jackpot opening command) set in the second jackpot opening process are sub-integrated by the sub-integrated board command transmission process (step S92) shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the board 763.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58, when the special electric accessory big hit process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the second job flag is “5” (step S8750). If the second job flag is not “5” (NO in step S8750), the special electric utility jackpot process is terminated.

  If the second job flag is “5” (YES in step S8750), it is determined whether or not the jackpot opening time counted by the second jackpot opening timer or the second jackpot gaming jackpot opening timer has increased (step). S8752). If the jackpot opening time is not up (NO in step S8752), the special electric utility jackpot process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the big hit opening time is up (YES in step S8752), the lower drive hole 83 (opening / closing device) is opened by the attacker drive mechanism 339 (step S8754). Then, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the opening / closing device has passed (step S8756). If the opening time has passed (YES in step S8756), the lower large winning opening 83 (opening / closing device) is operated by the attacker drive mechanism 339. Is closed (step S8758). Even if the opening / closing time of the switchgear has not elapsed (NO in step S8756), if the maximum number of game balls is won in the switchgear (YES in step S8760), the attacker drive mechanism 339 lowers The large side prize opening 83 (opening / closing device) is closed (step S8758). If the maximum number of game balls has not won in the switchgear (NO in step S8760), the process returns to step S8756.

  After closing the lower large winning opening 83 (opening / closing device), it is determined whether the opening / closing operation of the opening device has reached a predetermined number of rounds (here, 15 rounds) (step S8762). Specifically, the determination of the number of rounds is executed based on whether or not the value stored in the round counter reaches “15”. If the predetermined number of rounds has been reached (YES in step S8762), the jackpot flag (second jackpot flag or second jackpot game jackpot flag) is set to OFF (step S8764). Then, “0” is set to the second job flag described above (step S8766), and the special electric utility jackpot process is terminated. On the other hand, if the predetermined number of rounds has not been reached (NO in step S8762), 1 is added to the round counter (step S8768). And the interval command which is a command which instruct | indicates the production | presentation pattern corresponding to the interval between jackpot game rounds performed with the sub integration board | substrate 763 is transmitted (step S8770), and it returns to step S8754.

  By the way, although not shown, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a predetermined number of rounds are executed by the special electric utility jackpot process (that is, a series of operations of the jackpot game is executed)). On the condition, the short-time function operation process is executed as a post-process of the special electric utility jackpot process. At this time, the short function activation process is a process for variably setting the probability of entering a game ball into the special symbol start port 82 to a higher probability. More specifically, when it is determined that the advantageous game execution means 608 is in the advantageous game (short-time game), the fact is output to the normal hit game execution means 607. As a result, the normal hit game execution means 607 operates a so-called opening extension function, and always employs a long opening time (for example, “5700 ms”) as the operation time of the normal electric accessory 81.

  Note that the second small hitting member actuating process shown in FIG. 55 and the special electric accessory big hitting process shown in FIG. 58 are actually performed on the main control board 765 and the sub-integrated board 763. It is executed independently according to the timer interrupt at. However, in this embodiment, for convenience of explanation and easy understanding, the processing in the main control board 765 and the processing in the sub-integrated board 763 are described as sequential processes that are continuous as a series of processes.

[Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 775 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the payout control side power-on process will be described, followed by the payout control side timer interruption process, various prize ball stock addition processes, prize ball stock monitoring process, payout ball removal determination setting process, payout setting process, ball removal setting Processing will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of power-on of the payout control side. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the payout control side power-on process of FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control side power-on process following FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control side timer interrupt process. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing for adding the number of winning ball stocks. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the stock monitoring process. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout ball removal determination setting process. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout setting process. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball removal setting process. The award ball stock number adding process, the winning ball stock number adding process, the stock monitoring process, and the payout ball removal determination setting process are the main operation setting processes in step S264 in the payout control side power-on process described later. The priority order is set in the order of a prize ball stock number addition process for a prize ball, a prize ball stock number addition process for a rented ball, a stock monitoring process, and a payout ball removal determination setting process.

<1. Discharge control side power-on processing>
When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the payout control MPU 775a of the payout control board 775 performs payout control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. When the payout control side power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 775a sets an interrupt mode (step S200). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority order of the interruption of the payout control MPU 775a. In this embodiment, a payout control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when this payout control side timer interrupt process is interrupted, the process is preferentially performed. Subsequent to step S200, input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) is performed (step S202). In this I / O input / output setting, an I / O port input / output setting of the payout control MPU 775a is performed. Following step S202, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S204). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power outage or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is suddenly stopped) occurs, the voltage decreases, and when the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage signal is input as a power outage notice. A power failure signal is input when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage. Therefore, in the wait timer process 1, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Subsequent to step S204, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 769 is operated (step S206). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 769 is operated and the operation signal (detection signal) is input to the payout control MPU 775a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 769 is operated. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 769 is not operated.

  When the RAM clear switch 769 is operated in step S206, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S208), while when the RAM clear switch 769 is not operated in step S206, the payout A value 0 is set to the RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S210). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in, for example, a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 775a. This is a flag indicating whether or not to delete payout information (details will be described later) relating to payout, such as the number and various flags (and various information stored in various information storage areas). A value of 1 is set when deleting, and a value of 0 is set when not paying out information. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S208 and step S210 is stored in a general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the payout control MPU 775a.

  Following step S208 or step S210, it is determined whether or not the ball removal switch 779 is operated (step S212). This determination is made based on whether or not the ball removal switch 779 is operated and an operation signal (detection signal) is input to the payout control MPU 775a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the ball removal switch 779 is operated. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the ball removal switch 779 is not operated.

  When the ball removal switch 779 is operated in step S212, a value 1 is set to the ball removal flag RMV-FLG (step S214). On the other hand, when the ball removal switch 779 is not operated in step S212, the ball removal flag 7 A value 0 is set in RMV-FLG (step S216). This ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150 are to be discharged. Value 1 when discharging the game balls, when not discharging the game balls Each value is set to 0. Note that the ball removal flag RMV-FLG set in step S214 and step S216 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 775a.

  Subsequent to step S214 or step S216, a setting for permitting access to the payout internal RAM is performed (step S220). With this setting, the payout internal RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out. Subsequent to step S220, the stack pointer is set (step S222). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S222, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S222, it is determined whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S224). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 in step S224, that is, when the payout information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S226). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout internal RAM as a numerical value. Subsequent to step S226, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control side power-off process (power-off) described later (step S228). . If they match, it is determined whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S230). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG stores or holds payout backup information such as payout information, a checksum value, and a value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG in the payout internal RAM in the payout control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the payout control side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the payout control side power-off process is not normally terminated.

  When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S230, that is, when the payout control side power-off process has been completed normally, the work area of the payout internal RAM is set as power recovery (step S232). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 0, the power recovery time information is read from a ROM built in the payout control MPU 775a (hereinafter referred to as “payout built-in ROM”). Time information is set in the work area of the payout internal RAM. Here, “when power is restored” includes, in addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, as well as the state where the power is restored after the power failure or the instantaneous power failure as described above.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S224, that is, when the payout information is deleted, or when the checksum values do not match in step S228, or step If the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in S230, that is, if the payout control side power-off process has not ended normally, the entire area of the payout built-in RAM is cleared (step S234). Then, the work area of the payout built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S236). In this setting, initial information is read from the payout built-in ROM, and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout internal RAM.

  Subsequent to step S232 or step S236, interrupt initialization is performed (step S238). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when payout control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 1.75 ms. Subsequent to step S238, interrupt permission is set (step S240). With this setting, the payout control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S238, that is, every 1.75 ms.

  Following step S240, it is determined whether a power failure signal is input (step S242). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure signal is input as a power failure warning when the voltage is equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S242 is performed based on this power failure signal. When no power failure signal is input in step S242, it is determined whether or not the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S244). This 1.75 ms elapse flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 1.75 ms in a payout control timer interrupt process processed every 1.75 ms, which will be described later. The value is set to 0 when 75 ms has not elapsed. When the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S244, that is, when 1.75 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S242 to determine whether or not a power failure signal is input. On the other hand, when the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S244, that is, when 1.75 ms has elapsed, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to 0 (step S246), and the external watchdog is set. A clear signal is turned ON to the timer (external WDT) 775c (step S248). The external WDT 775c is for monitoring the operation (system) of the payout control MPU 775a. When the external WDT 775c is not cleared within a certain period, the payout control MPU 775a is reset (whether the system of the payout control MPU 775a is not running out of control). Diagnosed).

  Subsequent to step S248, port output processing is performed (step S250). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout internal RAM from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 775b, and various signals are output based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, ACK information indicating that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 765 have been normally received, drive information for controlling drive to the ball payout device 170, and the ball payout device actually playing the game Various information such as information on the number of balls that have been paid out, LED display information displayed on the error LED display 777, and reception completion information that indicates that a rent request signal from the prepaid card unit 1a has been received normally. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 765 when the various commands relating to the payout from the main control board 765 are normally received from the output terminal based on the output information, and the driving signal is sent to the ball payout device 170. Or the number of balls actually paid out by the ball dispensing device 170 as a prize ball number signal (in this embodiment, Each time the dispensing device 170 actually pays out 10 game balls, a prize ball number signal is output.), A display signal is output to the error LED display 777, or a loan request from the prepaid card unit 1a. When the signal is normally received, a reception completion signal is output to the prepaid card unit 1a.

  Subsequent to step S250, port input processing is performed (step S252). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the payout control I / O port 775b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the error release switch 778, a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 106, a detection signal from the counting switch 105, a detection signal from the full switch 107, a renting request signal and a connection signal from the prepaid card unit 1a, An ACK signal from the main control board 765 that indicates that the main control board 765 has normally received various commands transmitted in a command transmission process described later is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S252, timer update processing is performed (step S254). In this timer update process, the detailed description thereof will be described later, but when the ball dispensing device 170 determines whether or not the sphere is caused, the sphere detection time, the sphere detection time set as the determination condition is set. The ball removal determination time set when the game balls stored in the tank 136 and the tank rail 150 are discharged, and is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the lower plate 31 is full. Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the ball payout device 170 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on a detection signal from a ball break switch (not shown) provided in the ball payout device 170. Time management such as the ball breakage determination time set as the determination condition when performing the above. For example, when the sphere collision determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interruption period is set to 1.75 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the sphere collision determination time is subtracted by 1.75 ms. Since the subtraction result is a value of 0, the sphere collision determination time is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ball removal determination time is set to 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is set to 504 ms, and the ball breakage determination time is set to 119 ms. By subtracting 1.75 ms at a time and the subtraction result becomes 0, the ball removal determination time and the full tank determination time are accurately measured. These various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout internal RAM as time management information.

  Following step S254, CR communication processing is performed (step S256). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, it is determined whether or not a rent request signal from the prepaid card unit 1a is input, or the prepaid card unit It is determined whether or not the connection signal from 1a is input. When a lending request signal is input and the lending request signal is normally received, reception completion information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area described above, and the lending request signal is paid out as lending information. Store in the rented ball information storage area of the internal RAM. On the other hand, when the ball rental request signal cannot be normally received, the ball rental request error information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area of the payout built-in RAM.

  When a connection signal is input, CR connection information that indicates that the connection with the prepaid card unit 1a is normal is stored in the state information storage area. When the connection signal is not input, CR connection information indicating that the connection with the prepaid card unit 1a is abnormal is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S256, a full tank and out-of-ball check process is performed (step S258). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the lower plate 31 is filled with game balls based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 107. It is determined whether or not the number of game balls taken into the ball payout device 170 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on a detection signal from a ball break switch provided in the ball payout device 170. Or For example, whether or not the lower tray 31 is full of game balls is determined by using a timer interruption period of 1.75 ms, and a detection signal from the full tank switch 107 in the current full tank and out of ball check processing. Is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank switch 107 is turned OFF in the previous full (1.75 ms before) full ball and out of ball check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank switch 107 is changed from OFF to ON. In some cases, the timer update process in step S254 starts counting the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the full tank switch 107 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 107 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the lower tray 31 is full of game balls is stored in the state information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 107 is OFF, it is stored in the state information storage area area that the lower plate 31 is filled with the game ball and the fact that it is not full is informed.

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the ball payout device 170 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interruption period 1.75 ms, When the detection signal from the switch is ON, the detection signal from the ball break switch is turned OFF in the previous full (1.75ms before) full ball and ball break check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball break switch is ON from OFF When the transition is made, the counting of the ball breakage determination time (119 ms) described above is started in the timer update process in step S254. When the ball break determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball break determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the ball break switch is ON in the full tank and ball break check processing. Determine. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball break switch is ON, ball break information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the ball payout device 170 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is stored in the state information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the ball break switch is OFF, ball break information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the ball payout device 170 is not more than a predetermined number is stored in the state information storage area. To do.

  Following step S258, command reception processing is performed (step S260). In this command reception process, various commands relating to payout from the main control board 765 are received. When the various commands are normally received, ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, connection abnormality information that indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775 is stored in the state information storage area described above. . A detailed description of various commands related to payout from the main control board 765 will be described later.

  Following step S260, command analysis processing is performed (step S262). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S260 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S262, main operation setting processing is performed (step S264). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball scoring are performed, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. A detailed description of these operation settings and monitoring will be described later.

  Following step S264, LED display data creation processing is performed (step S266). In this LED display data creation process, various types of information are read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 777 of the payout control board 775 is created, and LED display information is stored in the above-described output information storage area. Remember. For example, the above-mentioned ball piece information is read from the state information storage area, display data corresponding to this ball piece information is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Following step S266, command transmission processing is performed (step S268). In this command transmission process, various information is read out from the state information storage area described above, a command is created based on the various information, and is transmitted to the main control board 765.

  Following step S268, the clear signal to the external watchdog timer (external WDT) 775c is turned off (step S270). As a result, the external WDT 775c is cleared to prevent the payout control MPU 775a from being reset, and the external WDT 775c starts timing.

  Following step S270, the process returns to step S242 again to determine whether or not a power failure signal is input. If this power failure signal is not input, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S244. When the 1.75 ms elapse flag HT-FLG is a value 1, that is, when 1.75 ms elapses, the value 1. is set in the 1.75 ms elapse flag HT-FLG in step S246, and the step In step S248, a clear signal is output to the external WDT 775c, port output processing is performed in step S250, port input processing is performed in step S252, timer update processing is performed in step S254, CR communication processing is performed in step S256, and step S258 is performed. Perform full tank and out of ball check processing, receive command in step S260 In step S262, command analysis processing is performed. In step S264, main operation setting processing is performed. In step S266, LED display data creation processing is performed. In step S268, command transmission processing is performed. In step S270, the external WDT 775c is cleared. A signal is output, and Steps S242 to S270 are repeated. The processing from step S242 to step S270 is referred to as “payout control side main processing”.

  Depending on the progress of the game on the main control board 765, the processing content of the payout control side main process varies. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 775a varies. Accordingly, the payout control MPU 775a preferentially outputs to the main control board 765 an ACK signal notifying that various commands related to payout from the main control board 765 have been normally received in the port output process of step S250. As a result, the payout control MPU 775a secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processes can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when a power failure signal is input in step S242, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S272). With this setting, payout control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout internal RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected. Subsequent to step S272, the output of the drive signal to the ball payout device 170 is stopped (step S274). Thereby, payout of the game ball is stopped. Following step S274, the clear signal is turned ON / OFF to the external WDT 775c (step S276). This clears the external WDT 775c. Subsequent to step S276, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S278). The checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information in the work area of the payout built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the checksum value calculated in step S226 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG. Subsequent to step S278, a value 1 is set to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG. (Step S280) This completes the storage of the payout backup information. Subsequent to step S280, prohibition of access to the payout internal RAM is set (step S282). With this setting, access to the payout internal RAM is prohibited, and writing and reading cannot be performed, and the payout backup information stored in the internal payout RAM is protected. Following step S282, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the clear signal is not turned ON / OFF to the external WDT 775c. For this reason, the payout control MPU 775a is reset, and then the payout control MPU 775a performs the payout control side power-on process again. The processing from step S272 to step S282 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 775a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the payout control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S228, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout built-in RAM is normal. In step S230, it is checked whether or not the payout control side power-off process has been normally completed. I am inspecting. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout built-in RAM twice, it is inspected whether the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

<2. Payout control side timer interrupt processing>
Next, payout control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt period (1.75 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control side power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control side timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 775a of the payout control board 775 sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 62 (step S290). Here, the general purpose storage element (general purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control side main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control side timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control side main processing from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S290, a value 1 is set in the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S292). The 1.75 progress flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 1.75 ms every time the payout control side timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 1.75 ms. Each value is set to 0 when .75 ms has not elapsed. Subsequent to step S292, the register is switched (returned) (step S294). This return is performed by reading the contents saved on the stack in step S290 and writing them to the register. Subsequent to step S294, interrupt permission is set (step S296), and this routine ends.

<3. Various prize ball stock addition processing>
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The prize ball stock number addition process includes a prize ball prize ball number addition process and a rental ball prize ball number addition process. The prize ball prize ball number addition process is performed from the main control board 765. This is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command, which will be described later. It is. First, the award ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the award ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described. In this embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is set to be performed preferentially, and according to the number of prize balls stock added in this prize ball stock number addition process. After the game balls are paid out by the ball payout device 170, a setting is made such that the number of winning ball stocks for lending is added.

  When the prize ball stock number addition process for the prize ball is started, the payout control MPU 775a of the payout control board 775 determines whether or not there is a prize ball command as shown in FIG. 63 (step S300). This determination is made based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process in step S262 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout internal RAM. In step S300, the received command information is read from the received command information storage area to determine whether the command is a prize ball command.

  If the received command information is a prize ball command in step S300, the prize ball number PBV corresponding to the prize ball command is read from the prize ball number information table (step S302). The prize ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout control ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV. Subsequent to step S302, the winning ball stock number PBS is read from the payout built-in RAM (step S304). This award ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out by the ball payout device 170, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) in this embodiment. ing. As a result, the award ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from 0 to 65535. The prize ball number PBV read in step S302 is added to the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S304 (step S306), and this routine ends. After the addition in step S306, the prize ball command read in step S300 is erased from the received command information storage area.

  On the other hand, if the received command information is not a prize ball command in step S300, this routine is ended as it is.

  Next, the processing for adding the number of winning ball stocks will be described. When the processing for adding the number of winning ball stocks is started, the payout control MPU 775a of the payout control board 775 determines whether or not there is a loan request signal as shown in FIG. 64 (step S310). This determination is made based on the lending request signal from the prepaid card unit 1a in the port input process of step S252 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the lending request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S310, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a lending request signal.

  When there is a lending request signal in step S310, the winning ball stock number PBS is read from the payout built-in RAM (step S312), and the lending number RBV is added to this award ball stock number PBS (step S314), and this routine is terminated. To do. The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout control ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. In addition, after adding in step S314, the rent request signal read in step S310 is deleted from the input information storage area. In the present embodiment, priority is given to prize balls (the prize balls and the rental balls are managed separately). For this reason, even when there is a ball rental request signal, the ball rental request signal is held, and when the prize ball is paid out, the ball is paid out. Accordingly, the rented ball is paid out after the prize ball stock PBS becomes zero.

  On the other hand, when there is no lending request signal in step S310, this routine is finished as it is.

<4. Stock monitoring process>
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. This stock monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not the game is continued in a state where the player has filled the game ball in the lower plate 31 during the game (stocked state).

  When the stock monitoring process is started, as shown in FIG. 65, the payout control MPU 775a of the payout control board 775 reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout built-in RAM (step S320). It is determined whether or not the threshold value is equal to or greater than the alert threshold value TH1 (step S322). The alert threshold TH1 is set to a value of 50 in this embodiment. When the prize ball stock PBS is greater than or equal to the caution threshold TH1 in step S322, the value 1 is set to the caution flag CA-FLG (step S324). This caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player has started to stock game balls in the lower plate 31, and that the number of game balls that have not been paid out (the number of prize ball stocks described above) has reached the caution threshold TH1 or more. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the threshold value exceeds the caution threshold value TH1, and to a value of 0 when the threshold value does not exceed the threshold value TH1.

  Subsequent to step S324, it is determined whether or not the prize ball stock number PBS read out in step S320 is greater than or equal to the warning threshold value TH2 (step S326). The warning threshold value TH2 is set to a value 300 in this embodiment. When the prize ball stock PBS is greater than or equal to the warning threshold value TH2 in step S326, the warning flag WA-FLG is set to 1 (step S328), and this routine is terminated. This warning flag WA-FLG indicates that the player has started to stock game balls on the lower plate 31, and that the number of game balls that have not been paid out (the number of prize ball stocks described above) has reached or exceeded the warning threshold value TH2. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the warning threshold value TH2 or higher is reached, and to a value of 0 when the warning threshold value TH2 or higher is not reached.

  On the other hand, if the prize ball stock PBS is less than the caution threshold TH1 in step S322, the caution flag CA-FLG is set to 0 (step S330), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the prize ball stock PBS is less than the warning threshold value TH2 in step S326, the warning flag WA-FLG is set to 0 (step S332), and this routine is terminated.

  If the gaming state becomes a big hit and the player relaxes and sees an effect unfolded on the effect display device 115, or looks into the action of the ornament main body 302, the player inadvertently makes one round. During this time, the game balls paid out as prize balls may not be removed from the lower plate 31 by operating the lower plate ball discharge button (not shown). If the game is continued in this state, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock PBS increases to become a warning threshold value TH1 and a warning threshold value TH2, which will be described in detail later. As a warning effect, a guidance voice flows from the speakers 18 and 57. Then, even if the player can be in a relaxed state where the game state is a big hit, if the game ball is not inadvertently pulled out from the lower plate 31, a warning effect will be performed, which will be annoying. It might be.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such discomfort as much as possible, in this embodiment, as described above, the value 300 is set to the warning threshold value TH2. This warning threshold TH2 is set to the number of game balls to be paid out as award balls for two rounds. For example, when one game ball enters the lower side big winning opening 83, when paying out 15 pieces as prize balls, one round (in this embodiment, the lower big winning opening 83 is opened from the closed state). Then, after 30 seconds have passed since the 15 game balls entered or opened, the lower big prize opening 83 returns from the open state to the closed state again.) The number of game balls to be paid out as a ball is 150 (= 15 × 10) when 10 game balls enter the lower large winning opening 83, and 300 (150 × 2) for two rounds. . If the storage capacity of the prize ball stock PBS is 1 byte (8 bits), only 0 to 255 unpaid balls can be stored. Then, by setting the storage capacity of the prize ball stock PBS to 2 bytes (16 bits), it is possible to store 256 or more unpaid balls.

  On the other hand, the alert threshold value TH1 is set to a value of 50, which is a stage before the prize ball stock PBS reaches the alert threshold value TH2, and will be described in detail later. By turning on the award ball lamp 396 as an effect, for example, the hall clerk can be informed that the player is careful about the game of the player, and the hall clerk informs the player that the game ball is to be removed from the lower plate 31. I can tell you. Thereby, the player can prevent the game from continuing further in a state where the game ball is full in the lower plate 31. In addition, even if the player is in a relaxed state where the gaming state is a big hit, even if the player does not inadvertently pull out the game ball from the lower plate 31, the player in the hall will not be able to The fact that the game ball is to be pulled out from the lower plate 31 is notified, and an annoying situation can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the alert threshold value TH1 is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). It is set to 1/6 of the value 300 of TH2. As a result, it is possible to inform the hall clerk that the player should be alerted to the game at the earliest possible stage.

<5. Dispensing ball removal determination setting process>
Next, the payout ball removal determination setting process will be described. In the payout ball removal determination setting process, the game balls are paid out to the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 31 by the ball paying device 170, or the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150 are discharged from the pachinko machine 1. This is a process for setting whether to perform such payout or discharge.

  When the payout ball removal determination setting process is started, the payout control MPU 775a of the payout control board 775 determines whether or not the ball ball flag PBE-FLG is a value 1 as shown in FIG. S340). The ball ball flag PBE-FLG will be described in detail later, but is set to a value of 1 when the ball payout device 170 performs a ball ball movement operation, and to a value of 0 when the ball ball ball movement operation is not performed. Is set.

  In step S340, when the ball ball flag PEB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, when the ball ball movement operation is not performed, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the payout internal RAM (step S342), It is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is greater than 0 (step S344). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there is a number of unpaid balls in the game ball payout by the ball payout device 170.

  When the prize ball stock number PBS is larger than 0 in step S344, that is, when there is an unpaid ball number, it is determined whether or not the lower plate 31 is full of game balls (step S346). This determination is performed based on the full tank information stored in step S258 and the full ball check process in step S258 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the payout internal RAM. In step S346, the full tank information is read from the state information storage area to determine whether or not the lower tray 31 is full of game balls.

  When the lower tray 31 is not full of game balls in step S346, a payout setting process described later is performed (step S348), and this routine is terminated. As a result, the game balls are paid out to the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 31. On the other hand, when the lower plate 31 is full of game balls in step S346, this routine is finished as it is. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the ball dispensing device 170 is forcibly stopped when the lower tray 31 is full of game balls. If a prize ball is generated while the ball dispensing device 170 is forcibly stopped, the number of balls that have not been paid out by the ball dispensing device 170 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is calculated by the prize ball stock number calculation process shown in FIG. It will be added to increase.

  On the other hand, in step S340, when the ball pitching flag PBE-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when the ball pitching operation is performed, or in step S344, the prize ball stock number PBS is not greater than the value 0 (value 0). That is, when there is no unpaid ball number, it is determined whether or not the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a value 1 (step S350). As described above, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150 are to be discharged. The value is set to 0 when the ball is not discharged. The determination in step S350 is made based on the determination result in step S214 in the payout control side power-on process shown in FIG. That is, when an operation signal is input from the ball removal switch 779 of the payout control board 775, the value 1 is set to the ball removal flag RMV-FLG in step S214 in the payout control side power-on process, while the operation signal is If not input, a value 0 is set to the ball removal flag RMV-FLG in step S216 in the payout control side power-on process.

  When the ball removal flag RMV-FLG has a value of 1 in step S350, that is, when the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150 are discharged, a ball removal setting process described later is performed (step S352). Exit the routine. Thereby, the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150 are discharged.

  Here, when the power is turned off and then the power is turned on while the ball removal switch 779 is pressed, the ball removal setting process is performed in step S352 of the payout ball removal determination setting process and stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150. The game balls that have been made can be discharged. When this discharge is completed, a value 0 is set in the ball removal flag RMV-FLG.

  On the other hand, when the ball removal flag RMV-FLG has a value of 0 in step S350, that is, when the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150 are not discharged, this routine is ended as it is. As a result, game balls are not paid out or discharged.

  Next, the payout setting process will be described. This payout setting process is a process for driving the ball payout device 170 to make a setting for paying out game balls.

  When the payout setting process is started, the payout control MPU 775a of the payout control board 775 reads the drive command number DRV from the payout built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 67 (step S360). This drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the ball payout device 170, and is equivalent to the prize ball stock number PBS. Subsequent to step S360, it is determined whether or not the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S362). In this determination, it is determined based on the drive command number DRV whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the ball payout device 170 remains. When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S362, that is, when the number of game balls paid out by the ball payout device 170 is zero, output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the ball payout device 170 is set. (Step S364). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the ball payout device 170 and stored in the output setting storage area of the above-described payout internal RAM. Subsequent to step S364, the winning ball stock number PBS is read from the payout built-in RAM (step S366), and the real ball count PB is read (step S368). The actual ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the ball payout device 170. This count will be described in detail later, but in the port input process of step S252 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Based on the detection signal.

  Subsequent to step S368, the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S368 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S366 is set in the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV (step S370). The actual ball count PB is set to 0 (step S372), and this routine is terminated. When the drive command number DRV and the actual ball count PB are 0, in step S372, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S366 is set as it is to the drive command number DRV.

  On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S362, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the ball payout device 170, an output of a drive signal to the ball payout device 170 is set. (Step S374). In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal is set in the ball payout device 170 and stored in the output setting storage area. Following step S374, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 106 (step S376). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 106 in the port input process in step S252 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S376, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 106.

  When there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 106 in step S376, the drive command number DRV is decremented by 1 (decremented, step S378), and it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the counting switch 105 (step S380). ). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the count switch 105 in the port input process of step S252 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S380, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 105.

  If there is a detection signal from the counting switch 105 in step S380, the actual ball count PB is incremented by 1 (incremented, step S382), and this routine is terminated. In step S382, the real ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the real ball count PB. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 105 in step S380, this routine is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 106 in step 276, it is determined whether or not the ball collision determination time has elapsed (step S384). This determination is made based on the ball collision determination time updated in the timer update process in step S254 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball collision determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S384, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball collision determination time has elapsed. It should be noted that the ball dispensing device 170 performs a ball collision operation during the ball collision determination time. This ball collapsing operation is performed in order to eliminate a state where a game ball taken into the ball passage (not shown) of the ball dispensing device 170 is clogged.

  If it is determined in step S384 that the ball collision determination time has not elapsed, an output of a drive signal to the ball dispensing device 170 is set so as to perform the ball collision operation (step S386). In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the ball payout device 170 is set and stored in the output setting storage area of the payout built-in RAM described above. Subsequent to step S386, a value of 1 is set in the sphere ball flag PBE-FLG (step S388), and this routine is terminated. This in-bending ball flag PBE-FLG is set to a value of 1 when a ball-bending operation by the ball dispensing device 170 is performed, and to a value of 0 when a ball-bending operation is not performed. On the other hand, when the ball collision determination time has elapsed in step S384, a stop of the drive signal to the ball dispensing device 170 is set so as to end the ball collision operation (step S390). In this setting, driving information for stopping the driving signal is set in the ball dispensing device 170 and stored in the output setting storage area. Subsequent to step S390, a value of 0 is set in the spherical ball flag PBE-FLG (step S392), and this routine is terminated.

  Next, the ball removal setting process will be described. In this ball removal setting process, the ball dispensing device 170 is driven to discharge the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150.

  When the ball removal setting process is started, the payout control MPU 775a of the payout control board 775 determines whether or not the ball removal determination time has elapsed as shown in FIG. 68 (step S400). This determination is made based on the ball removal determination time updated in the timer update process in step S254 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball removal determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S400, the time management information is read from this time management information storage area to determine whether or not the ball removal determination time has elapsed. During the ball removal determination time, the ball dispensing device 170 performs a ball removal operation. This ball removing operation is performed to discharge the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150.

  When the ball removal determination time has not elapsed in step S400, the output of the drive signal to the ball dispensing device 170 is set to perform the ball removal operation (step S402). In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the ball payout device 170 is set and stored in the output setting storage area of the payout built-in RAM described above. Subsequent to step S402, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is set to 1 (step S404), and this routine is terminated. As described above, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150 are to be discharged. The value is set to 0 when the ball is not discharged. On the other hand, when the ball removal determination time has elapsed in step S400, a stop of the drive signal to the ball dispensing device 170 is set to end the ball removal operation (step S406), and this routine is finished. In this setting, driving information for stopping the driving signal is set in the ball dispensing device 170 and stored in the output setting storage area.

[Various commands related to payout]
Next, various commands related to payout will be described. First, the payout command (prize ball command) transmitted from the main control board 765 to the payout control board 775 will be described, and then the state command of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the payout control board 775 to the main control board 765, this state command A shaping state command obtained by shaping is described. 69 is a prize ball number information table showing an example of a payout command, FIG. 70 is a table showing an example of a status command, and FIG. 71 is a table showing an example of a shaping status command obtained by shaping the status command.

<1. Prize ball command>
The prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board 65 to the payout control board 775. For example, a prepaid card unit 1a is connected to the pachinko machine 1 (a device that communicates with the pachinko machine and supplies the pachinko machine to the pachinko machine as a rental ball by driving a payout motor of the pachinko machine ("CR machine"). 69) are arranged adjacent to each other, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), the prize ball commands transmitted from the main control board 765 to the payout control board 775 include commands 10H to 1EH ( “H” represents a hexadecimal number.), One award ball is designated by the command 10H, two award balls are designated by the command 11H, and a prize ball 15 is designated by the command 1EH. The payout control board 775 controls the payout device 170 to drive out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  Further, in the case where a ball rental machine (a device for directly paying out game balls as a rental ball on the upper plate (referred to as “general machine (cash machine)”)) is disposed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5B, command 20H to command 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 765 to the general machine. One prize ball is designated by the command 20H, and the prize is given by the command 21H. Two balls are designated, and the prize ball 15 is designated in the command 2EH. The general machine performs control for paying out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a command common to the CR machine and the general machine (self-check command), and the self-check is designated in the command 30H. This self-check command is not for paying out a prize ball, but for checking the connection state between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775, and is common to CR machines and general machines. Used.

  Here, a CR machine and a general machine (cash machine) will be described. In the CR machine, a prepaid card corresponding to the number of balls to be lent is purchased in advance at a ticket vending machine, and the prepaid card unit 1a disposed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 is inserted into the prepaid card 1 (ball A game ball is paid out as a rental ball from the payout device 170). Specifically, when the prepaid card is inserted into the prepaid card unit 1a, the balance information is read from the prepaid card by a card reader built in the prepaid card unit (not shown). The prepaid card unit 1a outputs a ball rental request signal to the pachinko machine 1 based on the balance information, and the pachinko machine 1 pays out a game ball as a ball from the ball payout device 170. On the other hand, in a general machine (cash machine), a dedicated machine for renting a ball is arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 '. By putting cash in the dedicated machine for rental balls, the dedicated machine for rental balls pays out game balls as rental balls based on the cash.

  The CR machine has a probability variation function that is not permitted for general machines, and is more popular among players in terms of euphoria than general machines. For this reason, sales of CR machines are managed by a third party as a countermeasure against tax evasion of the hall. Specifically, the prepaid card unit 1a can perform infrared communication with a sales information collection terminal, and the sales information collection terminal is connected to an information collection center of a prepaid card company by wire. This allows prepaid card companies to manage hall sales information.

  By the way, when a game machine 5 for CR machine having a probability variation function is mounted on a pachinko machine 1 ′ equipped with a payout control board 775 ′ for a general machine instead of the game board 5 ′ for a general machine, In spite of the pachinko machine 1 ′ for general machines, it is possible to allow a player to play a game using a CR machine having a probability variation function. For this reason, the player likes to play the popular CR machine and plays the game. Then, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 ′ on which the payout control board 775 ′ is mounted for a general machine is arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 ′ and connected to the information collection center of the prepaid card company. As a result, sales information is not transmitted to third parties. As a result, the hall illegally obtains sales by providing such a fraudulent game to the player.

  In this embodiment, the prize ball command has a storage capacity of 1 byte, that is, 8 bits, and the upper 4 bits of the 8 bits are used as a prize ball command for a CR machine or a prize ball for a general machine. Used as information that can be identified in the command. On the other hand, the lower 4 bits of the 8 bits are used as information for designating the number of game balls to be paid out to the player. As described above, the prize ball command for the CR machine is preset to 10H to command 1EH, and the prize ball command for the general machine is preset to 20H to command 2EH. In this way, the value 1 is designated for the CR machine in the upper 4 bits and the value 2 is designated for the general machine in the upper 4 bits, so that a transmission register (not shown) is initialized when the power is turned on, and the value 0 is set. Even if it is (default value), the lower 4 bits have a value of 0 and one prize ball is indicated, but since the upper 4 bits have a value of 0, a prize ball command for a CR machine, a prize for a general machine Does not correspond to any of the ball commands. Thus, even when a default value is transmitted to the payout control board 775 when the power is turned on, the payout control board 775 is discarded as an invalid command. The self-check command also has a storage capacity of 1 byte, that is, 8 bits, and the upper 4 bits among the 8 bits are used as a self-check command that is a common command for the CR machine and the general machine. As described above, the self-check command is 30H. In this way, any one of the adjacent 2-bit information for the CR machine can designate a prize ball command for a CR machine, a prize ball command for a general machine, or a self-check command. In 775, upon receiving the award ball command and the self-check command for the CR machine, the award ball command and the self-check command for the CR machine are discriminated and accepted based on the same 2-bit information adjacent to each other. When the payout control board 775 ′ receives the prize ball command and the self-check command for the general machine, the prize ball command and the self-check command for the general machine are discriminated and accepted based on the adjacent 2-bit information. Thereby, for example, even if the game machine 5 for the CR machine equipped with the main control board 765 having the probability variation function is mounted on the pachinko machine 1 ′ for the general machine, the general machine mounted on the pachinko machine 1 ′. If the payout control board 775 ′ for the CR machine normally receives the award command for the CR machine, it outputs an ACK signal to that effect to the main control board 765, but discards the received award ball command for the CR machine. It is like that. Therefore, even if the game board 5 'for the general machine is replaced with the game board 5 for the CR machine and the player plays a game, the player does not pay out the game ball as a prize ball.

<2. Status command>
The status command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and transmitted from the payout control board 775 to the main control board 765. As shown in FIG. 70, the status command is divided into a frame status, an error cancellation navigation, and a stock display. Priorities are set in the order of the frame status, error cancellation, and stock display. In the frame state, ball breakage, ball removal, connection abnormality, and CR disconnection are prepared. When the ball breaks, bit 0 (B0, “B” represents a bit) is set to 1 and the ball removal is performed. Among them, the value 1 is set to the bit 2 (B2), the value 1 is set to the bit 3 (B3) when the connection is abnormal, and the value 1 is set to the bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. Of the status commands, bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) for indicating that the frame is in the state are set to a value of 1 for B5, a value of 0 for B6, and a value of 0 for B7.

  The error canceling navigation requires a ball, a count switch error, and a retry upper limit error. The value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2) in the case of a ball, and the value is set to bit 3 (B3) in the case of a count switch error. 1 is set, and the value 1 is set to bit 4 (B4) in the retry upper limit error. Here, the “counting switch error” indicates whether or not a malfunction of the counting switch 105 of the ball dispensing device 170 has occurred. The “retry upper limit error” indicates that a payout that is not consistent is repeatedly performed. Of the status commands, bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) for indicating that the error cancellation navigation is performed are set to a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and a value 0 for B7.

  The stock display requires 50 or more stocks and 300 or more stocks. In 50 or more stocks, bit 1 (B0) is set to value 1, and in stocks of 300 or more stocks. The value 1 is set in bit 1 (B1). Of the status commands, bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) for indicating the stock display are set to a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and a value of 0 for B7.

<3. Formatting command>
The main control MPU 765a of the main control board 765 transmits various commands to the sub integrated board 763. These various commands are commands having a storage amount area of 2 bytes (16 bits), have a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a status indicating the type of the command, and 1 byte (8 bits). It has a storage capacity and is composed of a mode that shows variations of performance. When the main control MPU 765a receives the above-described state command from the payout control board 775, as shown in FIG. 71, the main control MPU 765a sets the additional information “10000001B (= 81H)” to the status and sets the received state command to the mode. It is set and shaped into a shaping state command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). This shaping state command is performed as one process of the sub integrated board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 40, and is transmitted to the sub integrated board 763. Note that the detailed description of the shaping state command is the same as the contents of the state command described above, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

[Details of effect display in effect display device]
This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 shows the contents of the control process on the sub-integrated board and the control process on the liquid crystal control board.

  As shown in FIG. 72, when the sub-integrated board 763 receives a normal symbol or special symbol fluctuation start command from the main control board 765 (YES in step S501), an effect display is performed based on these received fluctuation start commands. The variation pattern of the normal symbol or the special symbol in the device 115 is set (step S502). Specifically, the variable display pattern corresponding to the variable display pattern command is set, and the final stop symbol in the decorative symbol sequence is determined based on the success / failure command. The sub-integrated board 763 has a random number generating means (not shown), acquires a random number, and adds an effect mode of hitting notice according to the acquired random number. Further, the sub integrated substrate 763 sets these determined variation modes as a variation start command for the liquid crystal control substrate 758 (step S503). Specifically, a variable display pattern command, a final stop symbol command, an effect pattern command, and the like are set. Then, these set fluctuation start commands are transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 758 (step S504). As a result, the liquid crystal control board 758 can perform an effect display according to the lottery result, or can generate a sound or the like in accordance with the effect display.

  On the other hand, when liquid crystal control board 758 receives a change start command from sub integrated board 763 (YES in step S601), based on the change start command, a change mode in effect display device 115 is set (step S602), and thereafter The effect display device 115 is controlled (step S603). Specifically, the variable display pattern corresponding to the variable display pattern command is set, and the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol sequence is set based on the final stop symbol command. Further, an effect corresponding to the effect pattern command is determined, and a more specific effect mode is added. In other words, the liquid crystal control board 758 has random number generating means (random counter), and can add more specific effects to each variation pattern in the effect display device 115. As described above, in this example, the selection process of the variation pattern is shared by the main control board 765, the sub-integrated board 763, and the liquid crystal control board 758. Thus, the processing in the main control board 765 and the sub-integrated board 763 is performed. While reducing the burden of the movement, making the fluctuation pattern more complex and, in turn, improving the interest of the production.

  In the flowchart shown in FIG. 72, only the reception process of the change start command related to the effect control is described, among the command reception processes in the sub-integrated board 763 and the liquid crystal control board 758. That is, here, processing for a command at power-on or a command at the time of abnormality is omitted.

  By the way, in the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 of the present example, a decorative symbol that is variably displayed with periodicity, and a plurality of images are developed and displayed in stages according to a predetermined order during the variation of the decorative symbol. Step effects that can be performed are included. Hereinafter, the decorative design and the step effect will be described in detail.

[About decorative designs in effect display devices]
Next, the display mode in the effect display device 115 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining a display area displayed on the effect display device.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the effect display device 115 has a rectangular image display area 1150 having a long side in the horizontal direction, and a part of this display area is covered by the rotary sorter 294. Yes. Specifically, the upper right corner of the rectangular image display area 1150, the right half of the upper side that forms this corner, and the upper half of the upper right side that also forms the upper right corner, The area including the is covered by the rotary sorter 294. That is, the image display area 1150 is covered with the rotary sorter 294. Note that “covered” means that the covered region is crushed by being covered. Further, since the area covered by the rotary sorter 294 is covered and hidden by the rotary sorter 294, it can also be referred to as being “covered”.

  By the way, in the rectangular image display area 1150, an area that is not covered by the rotary sorter 294 becomes a visible area 1150a that can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, the image display area 1150 has a visible area 1150a and a crushed area 1150b (also referred to as a concealed area or a covered area). Further, the visible region 1150a is a main lottery information display region 1151 that occupies most of the entire region of the effect display device 115, and a lower part of the entire region of the effect display device 115 more conservatively than the lottery information display region 1151. A game information display area 1152 occupying only a part thereof. In FIG. 73, a rectangular image display area 1150 is an area displayed by a one-dot chain line, and a covered area 1150b is an area hidden by the rotary sorter 294, and a lead line with a symbol is drawn by the one-dot chain line. It is a territory.

  Further, the rotary distribution device 294 is arranged on the rear side of the game board 5 (game board 5a) and straddling the inside of the game area 37 and the outside of the game area 37. Specifically, the disc-shaped rotary sorter 294 has an opening 124 formed in the game area 37 and the game area 37 in which the disk surface and the surface of the game board 5a are parallel to each other. It is fixedly attached to the game board 5a across the outside of 37. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the rotary sorting device 294 includes a part covered behind the game board 5 (game board 5a) and a part visible inside the game area 37 (viewable area 294a). And have. And in this visually recognizable area | region 294a, it is comprised so that a player can visually recognize the accessory operation | movement of the rotary sorter 294. The effect display device 115 is disposed behind the game board 5a with a predetermined space between the display board 115 and the display surface of the image display area 1150 and the surface of the game board 5a. It has become. Thereby, the rotary sorter 294 and the display surface of the image display area 1150 become parallel.

  The “inside of the game area” is an inner area defined by the outer rail 76 in front view, and more specifically, an area sandwiched between the opening 124 and the outer rail 76 in front view. . The “outside of the game area” is an outer area defined by the outer rail 76 in front view, and more specifically, an area in which the front component member 79 is formed in front view.

  Further, the visible area 294a of the rotary sorting device 294 is almost half of the entire rotary sorting device 294. On the other hand, three specific regions 343 are provided at equal intervals (that is, provided at intervals of 120 degrees). Therefore, one or more specific areas 343 always appear in the visible area 294a. As a result, even if a game ball wins the grand prize winning unit 146 at any timing, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation that the game ball will always enter the specific area 343, which reduces the interest. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the game balls that flow down the guide passage 340 and are held by the carry-in piece 341 are lifted to the inlet 347 of the rotary sorter 294 by the game ball carry-in device 380 as described above. Both the 341 and the inflow port 347 are located in the visible region 294a. Moreover, the guide passage 340 is made of a transparent resin member so that a game ball rolling on the guide passage 340 can be visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to observe the process until the game ball that has won the grand prize opening unit 146 enters any area (specific area 343, normal area 344) provided in the rotary sorter 294. In addition, when a game ball enters the specific area 343, a special game is generated. Therefore, an important carry-in piece 341, an inflow port 347 and an area (specific area 343, normal area 344) related to the occurrence of this special game are Is also located in the visible region 294a. That is, even if the rotary sorter 294 is arranged across the inside of the game area 37 and the outside of the game area 37, the important carry-in piece 341, the inflow port 347 and the area (specific Since the region 343 and the normal region 344) may be positioned at least in the visually recognizable region 294a, the size of the rotary sorter 294 can be increased and the game region 37 can be used effectively. In addition, since the rotational speed can be reduced by increasing the size of the rotary sorter 294, important carry-in pieces 341, inflow ports 347 and areas (specific area 343, normal area 344) related to the occurrence of special games. Is positioned in the visually recognizable area 294a, it is possible to observe the manner in which the game ball enters any area (specific area 343, normal area 344), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  By the way, the rotary distribution device 294 is arranged behind the game board 5a and in the vicinity of the effect display device 115, more specifically, in a space provided between the game board 5a and the effect display device 115. Has been. Note that “behind the game board 5a and in the vicinity of the effect display device 115” means that it is closer to the effect display device 115 than the game board 5a in the depth direction. The arrangement position of the rotary sorter 294 will be specifically described. The disc surface of the rotary sorter 294 and the image display area 1150 of the effect display unit 115 face each other so as to substantially overlap each other. A dispensing device 294 is arranged. Thereby, the image display area 1150 of the effect display device 115 and the rotary sorter 294 become integrated. That is, the image display area 1150 of the effect display device 115 and the rotary sorter 294 are close to each other on the same plane without increasing the distance in the depth direction. Thereby, both the display in the image display area 1150 and the operation of the rotary sorter 294 are watched without feeling a sense of perspective between the image display area 1150 of the effect display device 115 and the rotary sorter 294. It becomes possible to observe. In particular, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a special game is generated when a game ball enters a specific area 343 provided in the rotary sorter 294. That is, it is determined whether or not a special game is generated depending on the winning timing of the game ball to the special winning opening unit 146. As described above, the winning timing of the game ball to the big prize opening unit 146 has a significant effect on whether or not a special game is generated. There is a close relationship between the operation and the occurrence of a special game (that is, the position of the specific area 343 is important when winning the big prize opening unit 146). In addition, the timing for opening the special prize opening unit 146 is after a certain period of time has elapsed since the special symbol variation display is stopped in the image display area 1150. Therefore, the display mode and the rotary distribution in the image display area 1150 are displayed. By gazing at the same time as the operation of the device 294, it is possible to predict whether or not a special game will occur, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the lottery information display area 1151, an effect related to the normal symbol success / failure determination means 602, an effect related to the special symbol success / failure determination means 612, or an accessory when a game ball enters the first game area in the center accessory 91. An effect related to the lottery is displayed. Note that the “effects related to the role drawing” refers to the lottery between the time when the game ball enters the first game area in the center role 91 and the time when the game ball is distributed by the rotary sorter 294. This is an effect displayed in the information display area 1151.

  In the lottery information display area 1151, only the two left and right decorative symbol columns that are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction are set as the decorative symbols corresponding to the normal symbols, and are variably displayed for each decorative symbol column. It has become so. In the present embodiment, since the horizontal direction is an effective line, the lottery result by the normal symbol success / failure determination unit 602 is displayed by a combination of two left and right decorative symbol rows. The series of decorative symbols is composed of a main decorative symbol with numbers “0” to “9” and sub-decorative symbols made up of pictures, and the main decorative symbols are in ascending or descending numerical order. A sub-decoration symbol is arranged between the main ornament symbols and a series of ornament symbol rows are formed. Then, the normal symbol image display control means 631 (see FIG. 37) performs variable display control of the main decorative symbol and the sub decorative symbol from the upper left to the lower right with periodicity. Specifically, the decorative symbols are displayed in a manner that draws an arc along the outer periphery of the rotary sorter 294. Therefore, the length of the decorative symbol in the variation direction can be further increased, and many symbols can be displayed in the variation direction. In addition, by displaying the decorative symbols in a manner of drawing an arc, the decorative symbols are displayed as if they are raised, and a three-dimensional visual effect is obtained. Thereafter, the display of the decorative symbols is changed in the order of left decorative symbol sequence → right decorative symbol sequence, and when the two decorative symbols are aligned with a combination of normal decorative symbols at the time of the stop, the normal symbol is displayed as “special symbol start port 82. “Operate to win a prize”, specifically, “put left” is displayed. In this embodiment, the combination of “3, 3” and the combination of “7, 7” are normal hits. When the stop symbol sequence (left decorative symbol sequence) that stops first among the two decorative symbol sequences stops at “3” or “7”, the reach state is determined by using these decorative symbols as reach formation symbols. To establish. In the present embodiment, the main decorative design and the secondary decorative design are controlled so as to change from the upper left to the lower right with periodicity along the visible region 1150a in the image display region 1150 (specifically This is to make it easy to visually recognize the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol by displaying (along the outer edge of the rotary sorter 294). In addition, by variably displaying the decorative symbol row in this way, each decorative symbol can be displayed in a large size, and a plurality of decorative symbols can be visually recognized in the variation direction of the decorative symbol. As a result, the arrangement of the decorative symbols constituting the decorative symbol sequence is not necessarily required to have regularity such as ascending order or descending order, and the design range is widened. In particular, it is possible to eliminate the profound feeling by using two decorative design rows. That is, when there are three decorative symbol rows, the player has a sense of expectation that a special game will occur when these three decorative symbols are aligned, for example. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even if the decorative symbols are aligned with, for example, “7, 7”, it is only possible to win a special start opening 96, and a special game can be performed immediately. It does not occur. Therefore, by using two decorative symbol sequences, even when the decorative symbols are arranged in the shape of “7, 7”, for example, even if the special game is not generated immediately, the special game is immediately It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the fact that it does not occur.

  Further, when the decorative symbol changes from the upper left to the lower right, the size of the decorative symbol gradually increases. As a result, a visual effect is obtained in which the decorative design is displayed in a three-dimensional manner from the back side toward the front side. Moreover, in the upper left, two decorative symbols are displayed clearly independently (that is, separately), while in the lower right, the two decorative symbols are displayed so as to overlap each other. Furthermore, in the lower left, the symbols in the front-rear direction of the decorative symbol rows also overlap. That is, it is not necessary to display the decorative design that has passed the stop position of the decorative design in a clearly visible manner. Accordingly, even when the size of the image display area 1150 is limited by being crushed by the rotary sorter 294 as in the present embodiment, the visible area 1150a can be used effectively.

  In the present embodiment, the symbols constituting the right decorative symbol row near the cover area 1150b among the two decorative symbol rows are displayed smaller than the symbols constituting the left decorative symbol row. Thereby, even when the decorative design is stopped, the display in the image display area 1150 can be given a sense of perspective, and a visual effect that the display in the image display area 1150 looks three-dimensional can be obtained.

  By the way, the image display area 1150 is covered with the rotary sorter 294 and the effect display apparatus 115 is formed in a deformed shape (that is, the covered area 1150b is formed), but is not necessarily limited thereto. It is not a thing. However, when the cover area 1150b is not formed and the entire image display area 1150 is the visible area 1150a, if the decorative design is variably displayed from the upper left to the lower right, an area in which the decorative design is not displayed is displayed. In addition to being unnatural, there is a problem in that in the process of playing a game, the area that is not displayed is worrisome and it becomes impossible to concentrate on the game. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by covering a part of the image display area 1150 with the rotary sorter 294, not only a novel display area can be formed, but also from the upper left to the lower right. As a result, it is possible to display the variation in the oblique direction toward the center, and to increase the size of the rotary sorter 294 without narrowing the game area 37.

  On the other hand, the game information display area 1152 includes a hold corresponding display area 1153 corresponding to the display of the normal hold ball lamp 323, a normal symbol corresponding display area 1154 corresponding to the display of the normal symbol display 333, and the special symbol display 332. A special symbol corresponding display area 1155 corresponding to the display. That is, the hold-corresponding display area 1153 indicates the hold state of the normal symbol variation display control. Also, the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154, the normal symbol variation display, and the lottery result by the normal symbol success / failure determination means 602 are displayed. Further, the special symbol corresponding display area 1155 displays the special symbol variation display and the lottery result by the special symbol appropriateness determination means 612.

  In the hold-corresponding display area 1153, a display mode corresponding to the number of normal symbols held is displayed. That is, in the hold-corresponding display area 1153, for example, if the number of normal symbols held is 1, the display area for one scale is displayed in a bright color, and if it is 2, the display area for two scales is displayed in a bright color. Is done.

  In the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154, an elliptical display area is displayed in a blinking manner, and the lottery result by the normal symbol success / failure determining means 602 can be grasped according to the display mode. In addition, when the lottery result is derived by the normal symbol success / failure determination unit 602, the normal symbol display unit 333 blinks and displays the elliptical display area while the normal symbol is changing.

  In the special symbol corresponding display area 1155, an elliptical display area is displayed in a blinking manner, and the lottery result by the special symbol determination unit 612 can be grasped according to the display mode. It should be noted that when the lottery result is derived by the special symbol success / failure determination means 612, the special symbol display 332 blinks and displays the elliptical display area while the special symbol is changing.

  Here, in the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154, while the normal symbol is changing on the normal symbol display 333, the elliptical display area blinks in correspondence with the change of the normal symbol, When the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol is displayed on the symbol display 333, the display area is stopped and displayed in a manner in which it is turned on or extinguished. Therefore, even if the effect related to the normal symbol success / failure determination means 602 is not displayed by displaying the effect related to the special symbol success / failure determination means 612 in the lottery information display area 1151, the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154 is displayed. The display area is displayed blinking.

  Also, in the special symbol corresponding display area 1155, while the special symbol is changed in the special symbol display 332, the elliptical display area is flashed and displayed in response to the change of the special symbol, and the special symbol display is performed. When the result of the lottery process for the special symbol is displayed in the device 332, the display area is stopped and displayed in a manner in which it is turned on or extinguished.

  In this example, the variation of the decorative symbol sequence in the effect display device 115 is controlled by the normal symbol image display control unit 631 and the special symbol image display control unit 632 (see FIG. 37), and the variation start time is set to the normal symbol image display control unit 632. After the start of change, the stop of change in the decorative symbol sequence is set as before the stop of change of the normal symbol. As a result, when the normal symbol variation display is started and stopped, the effect display device 115 does not perform the effect display, thereby preventing the ordinary symbol variation display from being confused with the effect display device 115. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the normal hit is made during the production of the production display device 115, that is, to impair the production effect.

  Next, a series of images displayed on the effect display device 115 as the game progresses will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77 are diagrams showing a series of flows displayed on the effect display device 115 as the game progresses. More specifically, FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 are diagrams showing effects related to the normal symbol success / failure determination means. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing effects related to the special symbol success / failure determination means. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an effect related to the lottery. However, FIGS. 75A and 76A to 76E also show the peripheral members of the effect display device 115 for convenience.

  When both the normal symbol and the special symbol have a holding number of zero, the display on the effect display device 115 is the display shown in FIG. That is, in the lottery information display area 1151, two decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and in the hold corresponding display area 1153, it is displayed that the number of normal symbols held is zero. In the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154, the elliptical display area is not blinked, and in the special symbol corresponding display area 1155, the elliptical display area is not blinked.

  When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 96, the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 333 is started to be changed and the two decorative symbols are started to be changed. Thereby, it can grasp | ascertain that the fluctuation | variation of the normal symbol started. Further, while the normal symbol is changing in the normal symbol display 333, and in the meantime, while the two decorative symbols are changing, the oval display area is blinked in the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154. Note that the variation of the normal symbol is performed as a premise for deriving the result of the lottery process by the normal symbol appropriateness determination unit 602.

  Then, if the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 96 while the normal symbol changes, the number of game balls that have passed through the normal symbol start port 96 is within a predetermined range (4 in this embodiment). )), The variable symbol display control is suspended. It can be understood from the display in the hold corresponding display area 1153 that the variable symbol variable display control is put on hold (see FIG. 74B). According to FIG.74 (b), it can grasp | ascertain that the number of holding | maintenance of a normal symbol is one piece.

  The result of the lottery process by the normal symbol success / failure determination means 602 is derived by a combination in a case where all symbols of the two decorative symbols on which the variable display is performed are stopped. These two decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of left symbol → right symbol. An effect for deriving the occurrence of a state (in this case, an effect image display of “ON AIR”) is performed (see FIG. 74D), and then reach variation is performed.

  Note that “reach fluctuation” means that a decorative symbol (left symbol in the present embodiment) other than the decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the right symbol) continues for a predetermined time, In the embodiment, the state is “3” or “7”), the state is stopped, swinging, enlarged, reduced, or deformed, or a plurality of decorative symbols fluctuate in synchronization with the same symbol, This means that the position has changed, and the possibility of jackpot occurrence continues before the final result is displayed.

  When the result of the lottery process by the normal symbol success / failure determination means 602 is a win, all the two decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the same specific symbol (see FIG. 74 (e)). It becomes easy for a game ball to win a special symbol start port 82. In the lottery information display area 1151, instead of displaying two decorative symbols, a display prompting the user to aim at the game ball toward the special symbol starting port 82 is performed (see FIG. 75A). In the present embodiment, an arrow pointing to the left is displayed at the special symbol starting port 82 arranged on the left side of the effect display device 115 in order to urge the player to aim the game ball.

  In the lottery information display area 1151, even if the effect related to the special symbol success / failure determination unit 612 is performed instead of the effect related to the normal symbol determination / rejection determination unit 602, the variable symbol variable display control is suspended. For example, the lottery is performed by the normal symbol appropriateness determination means 602, and the suspension of the normal symbol variation display control is released, and the display mode of the variation display by the two decorative symbols is internally determined. When the lottery by the normal symbol success / failure determination means 602 is a win (that is, when it is internally determined that all two decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the same specific symbol), the special symbol success / failure determination means 612 has an effect. Even if it is performed, the ordinary electric accessory 81 operates and it becomes easy to win a game ball in the special symbol starting port 82. In other words, regardless of whether or not the effect related to the normal symbol success / failure determining means 602 is displayed on the effect display device 115, if it is internally determined that all the two decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, the normal electric combination The thing 81 operates and it becomes easy to win a game ball in the special symbol starting port 82. Thereby, the efficiency of the lottery process by the normal symbol success / failure determination means 602 can be enhanced regardless of the presence / absence display of the special symbol success / failure determination means 612.

  In this way, when a game ball wins the special symbol start opening 82, in the lottery information display area 1151, the effect on the special symbol success / failure determination means 612 is given priority over the effect on the normal symbol success / failure determination means 602. That is, when a game ball is won at the special symbol start opening 82, in the lottery information display area 1151, it is assumed that two decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in order to derive the result of the lottery processing by the normal symbol hit / fail judgment means 602. In addition, instead of the variable display of the two decorative symbols, an effect related to the special symbol success / failure determination means 612 is performed. As a result, when viewed from the player, it appears that the change display of the two decorative symbols has been stopped.

  On the other hand, when the result of the lottery processing by the normal symbol success / failure determination means 602 is out of place, the normal symbol display 333 responds to the variation of the normal symbol on the condition that the normal symbol variation display control is suspended. The variation display of the two decorative symbols is repeatedly performed.

  In the lottery information display area 1151, as described above, even if the effect related to the special symbol success / failure determination means 612 is displayed instead of the effect related to the normal symbol success / failure determination means 602, the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154 is oval. The shape display area is blinking. Therefore, even if the display according to the lottery result by the normal symbol success / failure determination means 602 cannot be visually recognized in the lottery information display area 1151, the display in the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154 can be visually recognized, and thus the normal symbol is changed. The present situation can be grasped. In addition, since the effect related to the special symbol success / failure determination unit 612 is displayed in the lottery information display area 1151 occupying most of the area of the effect display device 115, the effect related to the special symbol success / failure determination unit 612 is not hindered. , Can suppress the decline of interest.

  Next, when a game ball wins in the special symbol start port 82, while the special symbol is changing in the special symbol display 332, “Long name” and “Artist name” are displayed in the lottery information display area 1151 as will be described later. A rank-up effect is performed (see FIG. 76 (a)). At the time of this rank improvement effect, an effect in which the person indicated by the “artist name” sings the music indicated by the “music name” is executed by the speakers 18 and 57 and the effect display device 115. Thereby, it can grasp | ascertain that the fluctuation | variation of the special symbol started. Furthermore, while the special symbol on the special symbol display device 332 is changed, the elliptical display area in the special symbol corresponding display area 1155 is blinked while the rank-up effect is being executed. The special symbol variation is performed on the premise that the result of the lottery process by the special symbol success / failure determination unit 612 is derived.

  When the fluctuation in the special symbol display 332 stops, the elliptical display area in the special symbol corresponding display area 1155 is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner (see FIG. 76 (b) or (d)). Thereby, the player can grasp that the result of the lottery process by the special symbol success / failure determination means 612 is derived.

  Here, if the result of the lottery process by the special symbol success / failure determination means 612 is a small hit (see FIG. 76 (b)), in the lottery information display area 1151, instead of a rank-up effect, a game is played toward the big prize opening 141. A display prompting the user to aim the ball is performed (see FIG. 76C). In the present embodiment, an arrow pointing up is displayed in order to urge the game winning ball 141 formed above the effect display device 115 to aim at the game ball.

  On the other hand, if the result of the lottery process by the special symbol success / failure determination means 612 is a big hit (see FIG. 76 (d)), the lottery information display area 1151 displays the characters “big hit” instead of the flashing display of the rank-up effect. (See FIG. 76 (e)), and then a special game occurs.

  If the variation of the special symbol is stopped and the variation display control of the normal symbol is suspended when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the variation of the normal symbol is started again in the normal symbol display 333, A series of processes 74 (a) to (e) are repeated. Also, in the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154, while the normal symbol is changing on the normal symbol display 333, the elliptical display area is blinked. However, at this time, in the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154, the display indicating that the game ball is urged to be directed to the big winning opening 141 formed above the effect display device 115 is performed. Do not show.

  By the way, despite the fact that the result of the lottery process by the normal symbol success / failure determination means 602 is a hit and the display prompting the user to aim the game ball toward the special symbol start port 82 is performed in the lottery information display area 1151, When the game ball does not win the special symbol start port 82, two decorative symbols are displayed again (see FIG. 75 (b)). However, at this time, even if the display mode of the variable display by the two decorative symbols is determined internally, the variable display by the specific display mode is performed instead of the variable display by the determined display mode. . In the present embodiment, this specific display mode is a display mode in which two decorative symbols are scrolled at high speed.

  When a game ball wins the big prize opening 141 and the game ball enters the first game area in the center bonus 91, the game ball that has entered the first game area is distributed by the rotary sorter 294. Until then, the lottery information display area 1151 performs the effects related to the lottery of the actors (see FIG. 77 (a)). In FIG. 77 (a), only a specific effect display related to the lottery for an accessory is shown, but an effect display related to this is actually performed. The details of the effects related to the lottery will be described later.

  When a game ball is drawn by entering a first game area in the center game 91, FIG. 77 (b) or 77 (c) is displayed depending on the lottery result. Is done. In the present embodiment, when a game ball that has entered the first game area in the center bonus item 91 is received by the specific area 344, a “big hit” character is displayed in the lottery information display area 1151 (FIG. 77B). After that, special games occur.

  On the other hand, when a game ball that has entered the first game area in the center accessory 91 is received in the normal area 345 instead of the specific area 344, the display returns to the variable display of two decorative symbols in the lottery information display area 1151 (FIG. 77 (c)). However, at this time, even if the display mode of the variable display by the two decorative symbols is determined, the specific display mode (two in the present embodiment) is not performed without performing the variable display by the determined display mode. The display is changed according to a display mode in which the decorative symbols are scrolled at high speed.

[Special symbol display mode and rotational movement of rotary sorter]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 78, 79, and 80. 78 to 80 are diagrams showing an example of the relationship between the special symbol display mode at the time of small hitting and the rotation operation of the rotary sorter, in which FIG. 78 shows the first phrase and FIG. 79 shows the first phrase. From the phrase to the second phrase, FIG. 80 shows from the second phrase to the third phrase.

  As described above, the rotary sorter 294 is arranged so as to cover the display area in the upper right portion of the effect display apparatus 115 having a rectangular display area. Thereby, since the display mode of the special symbol in the effect display device 115 and the rotation operation of the rotary sorter 294 can be simultaneously recognized, the position of the specific region 343 when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped can be determined. I can grasp. Moreover, as described above, it is constant at 1000 ms from when the change of the special symbol is stopped until the special winning opening 141 is opened, and after the special winning opening 141 is opened, the carry-in piece 341 is moved from the receiving position to the inserting position. The time until the displacement is constant at 3600 ms. Therefore, the timing at which the carry-in piece 341 is displaced from the receiving position to the loading position and the specific area 343 pass through the part facing the inlet 347, depending on which rotational position the specific area 343 is in when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. It is possible to grasp whether or not the timing to match.

  Further, the rotary sorter 294 is covered with the game board 5 so that a part of the rotary sorter 294 cannot be visually recognized. The part where the rotary sorter 294 is covered by the game board 5 is a part excluding the part covering the display area of the effect display device 115 and the part facing the inlet 347. Further, the inflow port 347 is provided at a position after the specific area 343 and the normal area 344 have passed through the portion covering the display area of the effect display device 115 and reach the portion covered by the game board 5. . In the present embodiment, the effect display device 115 is provided at a position along the upper side of the rectangular display area. Since the rotary distribution device 294 rotates clockwise, the specific area 343 and the normal area 344 flow before passing through the portion covering the display area of the effect display device 115 and reaching the portion covered by the game board 5. The entrance 347 will be reached. That is, the specific area 343 is always covered and hidden by the game board 5 and can be visually recognized only before reaching the portion facing the inflow port 347 (that is, when the game ball is involved). Accordingly, it is possible to more easily grasp whether or not the timing at which the carry-in piece 341 is displaced from the receiving position to the loading position and the timing at which the specific region 343 passes through the portion facing the inlet 347 are matched. Become.

  By the way, the change of the special symbol is performed by a rank-up effect. More specifically, the second lottery in step S8600 of FIG. 49 depends on which rank ranks up from 10th, 9th, 8th,... It can be grasped whether the lottery result in the variation start process (the result determined by the special symbol success / failure determination means 612 in FIG. 37) is a big hit, a small hit or a miss. In the present embodiment, at the time of a small hit, the display mode is selected and determined as one of “stop at“ first phrase ””, “stop at“ second phrase ””, and “stop at“ third phrase ””. (Refer to Fig. 53), if it is selected and decided to be "stop at" first phrase "", it will stop fluctuating at 8th place, and if it is selected and decided to be "stop at" 2nd phrase "", it will fluctuate at 5th place Stop and change and stop at 2nd place when “Stop at“ 3rd phrase ”” is selected and determined. On the other hand, when it is a big hit, it reaches the top rank which is the highest rank without stopping at any rank in the rank improvement effect. Thereby, the player can grasp the result of the jackpot determination process. Note that music is output during the rank-up effect. More specifically, the prelude is output outside the rank range, and the main part (rust) of the music is output in each of the “first phrase”, “second phrase”, and “third phrase”. Here, the first phrase is a partial phrase of the main part of the music. The second phrase is a phrase in which the music is further advanced than the first phrase. The third phrase is a portion where the music has advanced further than the second phrase.

  When the change of the special symbol is started, the out-of-service area is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 115 and the prelude of the music is output. After that, the display area of the effect display device 115 is once darkened so that the light runs. Is displayed. This is to make it possible to grasp that the display on the effect display device 115 is updated. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78, “10” indicating the 10th ranking, “9” indicating the 9th ranking, and “8” indicating the 8th ranking scroll display from the top to the bottom in the display area of the effect display device 115. And the first phrase is output. Note that a plurality of numbers indicating the ranking are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 115, but the current ranking can be grasped by the color of the number indicating the ranking. For example, in FIG. 78 (a), it can be grasped that it is currently 10th, in FIG. 78 (b) it can be grasped that it is currently 9th, and in FIG. 78 (c), it can be grasped that it is currently 8th.

  When the display mode of the special symbol is selected and determined as “stop at“ first phrase ”” shown in FIG. 53, the variation of the special symbol stops in the mode of FIG. 78 (c), indicating that the ranking is 8th. Is displayed. On the other hand, when the selection of “Stop at“ 2nd phrase ”” or “Stop at“ 3rd phrase ”” shown in FIG. 53 is selected as the display mode of the special symbol, the ranking is displayed after the 8th ranking is displayed. The display area of the effect display device 115 is once darkened and displayed so that light can run without stopping the change at the eighth place. Then, as shown in FIG. 79, “7” indicating the seventh ranking (see FIG. 79A), “6” indicating the sixth ranking (see FIG. 79B), and “5” indicating the fifth ranking (see FIG. 79A). 79 (c)) is scroll-displayed from the top to the bottom in the display area of the effect display device 115, and the second phrase is output.

  Here, if the display mode of the special symbol is selected and determined to be “stop at“ second phrase ”” shown in FIG. 53, the variation of the special symbol stops in the mode of FIG. A message is displayed. On the other hand, when the display mode of the special symbol is selected and determined as “stop at“ third phrase ”” shown in FIG. 53, the change is not stopped at the fifth rank after the fifth rank is displayed. Once, the display area of the effect display device 115 becomes dark, and the display is performed so that light runs. Then, as shown in FIG. 80, “5” indicating the fifth ranking (see FIG. 80A), “4” indicating the fourth ranking (see FIG. 80B), “3” indicating the third ranking ( 80 (c)) and “2” indicating the second place (see FIG. 80 (d)) are scrolled from the top to the bottom in the display area of the effect display device 115, and the third phrase is output. The

  Note that the lottery result in the second lottery / variation start process in step S8600 of FIG. 49 (the result determined by the special symbol success / failure determination means 612 of FIG. 37) is determined to be a big hit, and “ When the display mode of “Large Bonus Display after Singing” is selected and determined, “1” indicating that the special symbol variation is ranked first is displayed without stopping in any ranking. Thereafter, the jackpot game is executed.

  In addition, at the position adjacent to the number indicating the ranking, the title of the music and the name of the artist who sings the music are displayed. While the special symbol is fluctuating, the titles and artist names of the music displayed at positions adjacent to the numbers indicating the ranking are scrolled and displayed for the titles of the plurality of music and the names of the artists. When the specific music and the name of the artist who sings the specific music are stopped and displayed at positions adjacent to the numbers indicating the ranking, it is possible to grasp that the variation of the special symbol has stopped.

  Incidentally, the position of the specific region 343 of the rotary sorter 294 is different for each of FIGS. 78 (c), 79 (c), and 80 (c). That is, the position of the specific region 343 in the rotation direction of the rotary sorter 294 is different between when the fluctuation stops at the eighth ranking, when the fluctuation stops at the fifth ranking, and when the fluctuation stops at the second ranking. ing. This is because the time from the end of the first phrase to the end of the second phrase and the time from the end of the second phrase to the end of the third phrase are rotated from one specific area 343 to the rotary sorter 294. This is because the time until the next specific area 343 in the direction is different.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the display modes of “stop at“ first phrase ””, “stop at“ second phrase ””, and “stop at“ third phrase ”” are variable times, respectively. 10 patterns of display modes are stored. Therefore, when the lottery result in the second lottery / variation start process in step S8600 in FIG. 49 (the result determined by the special symbol success / failure determination means 612 in FIG. 37) is a small hit, the display mode of the special symbol is determined by the player. Even if they look the same, the number of rotations of the rotary sorter 294 during the variation of the special symbol differs depending on the pattern selected and determined. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. FIG. 81 and FIG. 82 show the display mode of the special symbol, the rotation operation of the rotary sorting device, and the operation of the carry-in piece when the display mode of “stop at“ first phrase ”” is selected and determined at the time of a small hit. 81 is a diagram in the case of a display mode in which the variation time is 10000 ms with the shortest variation time, and FIG. 82 is a diagram in the case of the display mode with the longest variation time of 13600 ms.

  In FIG. 81, when the change of the special symbol is started, “notice” lower than the 10th ranking is displayed on the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 81A) and corresponds to the display mode selected and determined. "Prelude" of the song to be played is output. In FIG. 81 (a), one specific area 343 is directed slightly to the left from the vertically downward direction (the direction of the short hand in the case of about 6:30 in the time of the clock). Whether it is facing the direction is determined by the timing at which the change of the special symbol starts. Then, the ranking indicating the ranking is scrolled from top to bottom. FIG. 81 shows the display mode of the special symbol when the display mode of “stop at“ first phrase ”” is selected, and the scroll display stops at the character “8” indicating the eighth ranking. . In addition, the change of the song name and artist name displayed adjacent to “8” is also stopped. The stop of the scroll display, the change of the music title and the artist name corresponds to the stop of the change of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, since the three specific areas 343 are formed in the rotary sorter 294, only the one specific area 343 is described accompanying the specific area 343 for convenience of explanation. "No. 1" is displayed in black.

  When the variation of the special symbol stops at the character “8” shown in the ranking eighth place, the special winning opening 141 is opened accordingly. In the present embodiment, the rotational speed of the rotary sorter 294 is 10800 [ms / rotation], and the special symbol variation time is 10,000 ms, so that the special symbol variation starts and stops until it stops. It has moved nearly one round (see FIG. 81 (b)). More specifically, although one specific area 343 is not shown by the rotational movement of the rotary sorter 294, it is slightly to the right of the vertical downward direction (in the case of about 5:30 in terms of the time of the clock) (The direction of the short hand). The game ball that has won the first prize opening 141 after the first prize opening 141 is opened is held in the carry-in piece 341 at the receiving position (see FIG. 81 (c)). When two or more game balls are won in the big winning opening 141, as shown in FIG. 81 (c), the game balls stay in continuity with the game balls held in the carry-in piece 341. When 3600 ms elapses after the big prize opening 141 is opened, the carry-in piece 341 is displaced from the receiving position to the throw-in position, and the game balls held in the carry-in piece 341 are sent to the inflow port 347. When any of the regions 343 and 344 faces the inflow port 347 while the game ball stays at the inflow port 347, the ball enters the regions 343 and 344 facing the inflow port 347. In FIG. 81 (d), when a game ball stays at the inflow port 347, the first specific region 343 first faces the inflow port 347, so that the game ball enters the one specific region 343. To do. Then, the game ball that has entered the one specific area 343 flows out of the specific outlet 360, is detected by the game ball detection means 384, and a big hit game is performed.

  In FIG. 82, when the change of the special symbol starts, as in FIG. 81, “notice” lower than the 10th ranking is displayed on the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 82 (a)), and the selection is determined. The “prelude” of the music corresponding to the displayed mode is output. In addition, the direction in which the one specific area 343 is oriented is determined by the timing at which the change of the special symbol starts, but as in FIG. 81A, the one specific area 343 is slightly leftward from the vertically lower side. It shall be facing. Then, the ranking indicating the ranking is scrolled from top to bottom. In FIG. 82, since the variation time of the special symbol is 3600 ms longer than in the case of FIG. 81, the “attention” lower than the ranking 10th is displayed 3600 ms longer and the “prelude” of the music is output 3600 ms longer. The And since FIG. 82 shows the display mode of the special symbol when the display mode of “stop at“ first phrase ”” is selected, the scroll display is the character “8” indicating the eighth ranking. Stop. In addition, the change of the song name and artist name displayed adjacent to “8” is also stopped.

  When the variation of the special symbol stops at the character “8” shown in the ranking eighth place, the special winning opening 141 is opened accordingly. In the present embodiment, the rotational speed of the rotary sorter 294 is 10800 [ms / rotation], and the special symbol variation time is 13600 ms. Therefore, during the period from when the special symbol variation starts to when it stops. It has moved about 5/4 rounds (see FIG. 82 (b)). More specifically, although one specific area 343 is not shown in the figure due to the rotational movement of the rotary sorter 294, it is slightly to the right of the vertical downward direction (about 8:30 in the time of the clock) (The direction of the short hand). The game ball that has won the first prize opening 141 after the big prize opening 141 is opened is held in the carry-in piece 341 in the receiving position as in FIG. 81 (see FIG. 82 (c)). When 3600 ms elapses after the big prize opening 141 is opened, the carry-in piece 341 is displaced from the receiving position to the throw-in position, and the game balls held in the carry-in piece 341 are sent to the inflow port 347. When any of the regions 343 and 344 faces the inflow port 347 while the game ball stays at the inflow port 347, the ball enters the regions 343 and 344 facing the inflow port 347. In FIG. 82D, when the game ball stays at the inflow port 347, first, the normal region 344 after the one specific region 343 is opposed to the inflow port 347. A game ball enters the normal area 344 opposite to. Then, the game ball that has entered the normal area 344 flows out of the normal outlet 361. At this time, no jackpot game is played.

  In this way, since the variation time of the special symbol is selected and determined from any one of the ten patterns, the position of the specific region 343 when the variation of the special symbol is started and sent to the inlet 347 There is no correlation between whether or not the game ball enters the specific area 343. That is, whether or not a game ball enters the specific area 343 is determined not by the position of the specific area 343 when the change of the special symbol is started, but by the change time of the display mode selected and determined. Here, since the time from when the game ball is won to the special symbol start port 82 until the change of the special symbol starts is constant, the game ball winning timing to the special symbol start port 82 and the specific region 343 are determined. There is no correlation between whether or not a game ball enters. As a result, it is not possible to generate a jackpot game by timing the winning of the game ball to the special symbol start port 82, and it is not possible to increase the theoretical jackpot occurrence probability by the skill of the player (ie, the special symbol). Aiming at the winning timing at the start opening 82 does not affect the theoretical jackpot game occurrence probability).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time of 10 patterns is set for the same display mode, the rotation speed of the rotary sorter 294 is constant, and the probability of entering the specific area 343 on the accessory Is 1/10. Furthermore, there is only one specific area 343 facing the inflow port 347 during the time difference between the longest fluctuation time and the shortest fluctuation time (3600 ms in this embodiment). Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the player wins the game ball at the special symbol starting port 82, the theoretical jackpot occurrence probability becomes 1/10.

  In the present embodiment, three specific regions 343 are formed in the rotary sorting device 294, but this number is not limited, and as long as the rotational speed of the rotary sorting device 294 is constant, The number of the specific regions 343 facing the inflow port 347 may be one during the time of the difference between the longest variation time and the shortest variation time of the special symbol.

  81 and 82, the case where “stop at“ first phrase ”” is selected and determined as the display mode of the special symbol has been described. However, “stop at“ second phrase ”” and “third” Even when “Stop at Phrase” is selected and decided, as with the case where “Stop at“ First Phrase ”” is selected and decided, no matter what timing the game ball is awarded to the special symbol start opening 82 The theoretical jackpot probability is 1/10.

  By the way, in this embodiment, by providing 10 patterns as the variation time of the special symbol, the game ball is inserted into the rotary sorter 294 by the carry-in piece 341 from the time when the game ball wins the special symbol start port 82. The case where the elapsed time (in other words, the elapsed time until it is assigned to one of the areas by the rotary sorter 294) becomes 10 is illustrated. However, other methods may be adopted as long as a predetermined number (10 in this case) can be provided as the elapsed time.

  For example, instead of providing a plurality of patterns as the variation time of the special symbol, the variation time of the special symbol is made constant, and a plurality of waiting times until the carry-in piece 341 is displaced to the loading position after the big prize opening 141 is opened are plural. A timing pattern may be provided. In this case, 10 patterns are stored in advance in the ROM as the waiting time, and when the distribution device driving mechanism 336 opens the special winning opening 141 (or when determining the lottery result of the special symbol), the timing pattern is selected. Any one of the ten timing patterns may be selected from the ROM by the determining means. Then, the sorting device drive mechanism 336 may displace the carry-in piece 341 from the receiving position to the loading position based on the standby time based on the selected timing pattern.

  Even in the case where a plurality of patterns are provided as a waiting time until the carry-in piece 341 is displaced to the insertion position after the special winning opening 141 is opened, the theoretical condition for the specific area 343 is satisfied if the following conditions are satisfied. The probability of entering is always constant.

  When the rotary sorter 294 operates in a regular cycle every fixed time and the winning timing is stopped at least once within one cycle of the cycle, the theoretical probability of entering the specific area 343 is always In order to be constant, the following conditions must be satisfied. As the condition, a certain time required for one cycle corresponds to an integral multiple of a value obtained by multiplying the number of a plurality of timing patterns and the difference between the required times of each timing pattern (corresponding to the predetermined time of the present invention). And the total sum of specific times within one cycle (that is, the sum of specific times of winning timings within one cycle) is an integer multiple of the value obtained by multiplying the number of winning timing patterns and a predetermined time. This is true. If this condition is satisfied, regardless of the timing of accepting the game ball to the special symbol start port 82, the ratio of the winning timing pattern to a plurality of timing patterns and the specific time that falls within one period with respect to a certain time required for one period The ratio of the sum is almost the same. For example, if a certain period of time required for one cycle is 8000 ms, the number of timing patterns is 20, the predetermined time is 400 ms, and the number of winning timing patterns is 2, the total of specific times within one cycle is 800 ms. When expressed in mathematical formulas, T [ms] for a certain time, N [number] of timing patterns, Δs [ms] for a predetermined time, Σt [ms] for a total of specific times within one cycle, winning timing pattern It is a requirement that both the formulas “T≈N × Δs × α” and “Σt≈n × Δs × α” are satisfied, where n is the number of. Here, α is a constant (integer).

  When both the above formulas are established, a value (for example, 1/10) obtained by dividing n [pieces], which is the number of winning timing patterns, by N [pieces], which is the number of timing patterns, is one for a certain time. The ratio (for example, 1/10) of the sum total of specific times within the cycle is the same value. As a result, unless the timing pattern selection determining means intentionally deviates to an arbitrary timing pattern, it is opened / closed only when an arbitrary winning timing pattern is selected and determined from among a plurality of timing patterns. Of the game balls received from the device (big prize opening unit 146), one game ball is guided to the mechanical lottery device (rotary sorting device 294) at the winning timing. In other words, the relational expression “n / N = Σt / T” is established, and the theoretical probability of entering the specific area 343 is always constant regardless of the winning timing at the special symbol starting port 82, and the winning timing is It becomes impossible to aim.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, various ideas are provided in order to make the production operation of the rotary sorter 294 more interesting. For example, as described above, the plurality of LEDs arranged on the semicircular arc on the LED board 381 are connected to the player on the front side through the specific area 343 and the normal area 344 formed on the outer peripheral portion of the rotating body 297. Therefore, the light emission mode is visible. The player can be more interested in the rendering operation of the rotary sorter 294 by the light emission mode of the plurality of LEDs included in the LED board 381.

  More specifically, when a variation display of two decorative symbols and a rank-up effect are executed in the lottery information display area 1151, at least behind the specific area 344 among the plurality of LEDs of the LED board 381. The light emission is controlled so that the LED located is emitted. From the viewpoint of the player, each LED on the LED board 381 seems to emit light sequentially in the clockwise direction so as to follow the specific area 344 rotated in the clockwise direction by the rotary sorter 294. As a result, the production operation of the rotary sorter 294 is gracefully decorated, and the current position of the specific area 344 is suggested more emphasized, so that the player's sense of expectation can be further enhanced. .

  Further, when an effect for deriving occurrence of a reach state or a win (small hit or big win) is executed in the lottery information display area 1151, the light emission control is performed so that the plurality of LEDs of the LED board 381 are all turned on. The As a result, the production operation of the rotary sorter 294 is further gracefully decorated, and the player is given the greatest visual impact, so that the player can reach and win (small or big hits). ) Can be ascertained reliably.

  Thus, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment described above has the following technical idea. In addition, the following technical thoughts 1-19 are provided individually or in combination as appropriate.

[Technology 1]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 is
A game board having a game area;
A receiving port provided in the gaming area and capable of receiving a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area;
An opening and closing device provided in the game area, which is displaceable between a closed mode in which a game ball cannot be received and an open mode in which a game ball can be received;
At least one special region and one or more normal regions are provided at the periphery, and a rotary accessory that performs a rotational operation in the circumferential direction;
A guide device capable of supplying a game ball received from the switchgear to the rotary accessory;
Receiving port detecting means for detecting the passing or receiving of a game ball to the receiving port;
Lottery means for performing an internal lottery process based on the fact that a game ball has passed or received at the reception port by the reception port detection unit;
An opening / closing control means for displacing the opening / closing device from the closed mode to the open mode when the result of the lottery process by the lottery unit is a specific winning;
Guidance control means for controlling the operation of the guide device so that a game ball received from the opening / closing device is supplied to the rotary accessory at a specific timing;
An object lottery determination means for determining whether or not the object lottery is a mechanical lottery using the rotary type object;
And special game execution means for performing a special game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the winning selection is detected by the accessory lottery determination means,
A game control means having at least
A gaming machine equipped with
The guide device supplies the one game ball to the rotary combination by causing only one game ball out of the game balls received from the opening / closing device to face the periphery of the rotary combination. And
The normal region is formed by a normal selection port capable of receiving a game ball, and a normal peripheral wall adjacent to the normal selection port and facing the guide device prior to the normal selection port,
The special area is formed by a special selection port capable of receiving a game ball, and a special peripheral wall adjacent to the special selection port and the guide device facing the special selection port prior to the special selection port,
The accessory lottery determination means is for determining that the accessory lottery is won based on the fact that a game ball is received in the special selection port,
The special region has a thin wall so as to cover a part of the special selection port from the edge of the special selection port opposite to the rotation direction of the rotary accessory toward the rotation direction. The body is extended,
The wall body is characterized by forming the normal peripheral wall for allowing the normal selection port adjacent in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotary accessory to receive a game ball.

  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 (pachinko machine 1), a gaming board (gaming board 5) having a gaming area (gaming area 37) and a reception opening (special symbol start) through which a gaming ball can be passed or received. Mouth 82), an opening / closing device (large winning prize opening unit 146) that is displaceable between a closed mode and an open mode, and a rotary accessory (rotary sorter 294) for performing a predetermined bonus drawing , A guide device (game ball carry-in device 380) capable of supplying a game ball received from the opening / closing device to a rotary accessory, and game control means (main control board 765, sub-integrated board 763, and liquid crystal control) for controlling the game Substrate 758).

  The game control means includes: an entrance detection means (special symbol per-determination random number extraction means 611), a lottery means (special symbol success / failure determination means 612), an open / close control means (a big prize opening / closing mechanism 335), a guidance control means (allocation). A device driving mechanism 336), an accessory lottery determination means (special symbol success / failure determination means 612), and a special game execution means (big hit game execution means 618). When it is detected that the game ball has passed or received at the reception port by the reception port detection unit, an internal lottery process is performed by the lottery unit. If the result of the lottery process is a specific winning, the opening / closing control means displaces the opening / closing device from the closed mode to the open mode, and the gaming device can accept the game ball. The game balls received by the opening / closing device are supplied from the guide device to the rotary accessory by the guide control means. As a result, if it is determined that the winning item lottery is won by the winning item lottery determining unit, a special game advantageous to the player is performed by the special game executing unit.

  The guide device supplies the game ball to the rotary combination by causing only one game ball of the game balls received from the opening / closing device to face the periphery of the rotary combination. The normal area (normal area 344) is formed by a normal selection port that can receive a game ball and a normal peripheral wall that cannot receive a game ball, and the guide device faces the normal peripheral wall prior to the normal selection port. The special area (specific area 343) is formed by a special selection port that can receive a game ball and a special peripheral wall that cannot receive a game ball, and the guide device faces the special peripheral wall prior to the special selection port. When a game ball is received in this special selection port, it is determined that the winning lottery is won by the winning lottery determining means.

  Here, the special selection port has a thin wall body so as to cover the special selection port from the edge of the special selection port opposite to the rotation direction of the rotary accessory in the rotation direction. (Wall 3431) is extended. And this wall body functions as a normal surrounding wall for making a next normal selection port (selection port adjacent to the direction opposite to the accessory rotation direction) accept a game ball.

  In this technical idea 1, whether the game ball is received in the special selection port or the normal selection port in the lottery of the objects depends on the size of the special region or the normal region that can face the guide device. For example, as the special area is larger than the normal area, the probability that the game ball is accepted in the special selection opening is higher than that in the normal selection opening. For this reason, in order to make it easier for a game ball to be received in a special selection opening that is a trigger for generating a special game in the lottery for a bonus item, the area (or ratio) occupied by the special region on the periphery of the rotary bonus may be increased. That is, if the area length along the circumferential direction of the rotary accessory is made larger with respect to the special area, the probability of receiving the game ball at the special selection port is increased in proportion thereto.

  On the other hand, if a special game is excessively generated exceeding the original specification of the gaming machine, a great loss occurs in the pachinko hall or the like. For this reason, in a conventional accessory, the ratio of the special region in the accessory is formed by forming the special region smaller than the normal region, or by providing a plurality or a plurality of normal regions for one or a few special regions. Is made relatively small with respect to the ratio occupied by the normal area. However, with such a conventional role, the special area is less conspicuous than the normal area from the viewpoint of the player, giving the player the impression that the game ball cannot be accepted in the special selection slot, and expecting a special game. However, there was a problem that the interest decreased.

  Therefore, according to the present technical idea, the opening width (opening length) of the special selection port is narrowed by extending the wall so as to cover a part of the special selection port in the special region. Further, since this wall body is extended from the edge of the special selection port toward the accessory rotation direction, it functions as a normal peripheral wall for allowing the next normal selection port to receive the game ball. Specifically, if a large wall is provided in the special area, the special selection port becomes relatively narrow and it becomes difficult to accept the game ball, and at the same time, the normal peripheral wall that accepts the game ball in the next normal area is relatively It becomes wide and it becomes easy to accept game balls. On the other hand, if a small wall is provided in the special area, the special selection port becomes relatively wide and the game ball can be received easily, and at the same time, the normal peripheral wall corresponding to the next normal area becomes relatively narrow and the game ball. Becomes difficult to accept.

  In this way, it is relatively difficult to receive a game ball in the special selection port, and at the same time, it is relatively easy to receive a game ball in the next normal selection port simply by providing a wall in the special area. be able to. Furthermore, it is possible to arbitrarily adjust the probability of accepting game balls to the special selection port and the normal selection port in the lottery by simply adjusting the size of the wall. Therefore, it is possible to optimally adjust the probability of receiving the game ball to the special selection port and the normal selection port without complicating the structure of the rotary type object, and the balance is good for both the player and the pachinko hall, etc. It is possible to implement a lottery drawing.

  By the way, in the conventional accessory, the proportion of the special region in the accessory by forming the special region smaller than the normal region or by providing a plurality or a plurality of normal regions for one or a few special regions. Is made relatively small with respect to the ratio occupied by the normal area. However, in such a conventional accessory, the special area becomes less conspicuous than the normal area, giving the player the impression that the game ball is not accepted into the special selection slot, and the expectation for the special game is reduced. There was a problem that interest was reduced.

  Furthermore, when the proportion of the special area in the bonus is relatively small, the player must correctly understand the game specification that “a special game is generated when a game ball wins the special selection slot by the bonus drawing”. As a result, the game machine has a fundamental problem that it is impossible to convey to the player the original playability and interest of the game machine. On the other hand, if the proportion of the special area in the bonuses is inadvertently increased, excessive special games will occur exceeding the original specifications of the gaming machine as described above, and the balance between the player and the pachinko hall will be lacking. There was a problem.

  Here, since the wall according to the present technical idea is thin, the presence of the wall cannot be clearly recognized in front view. For this reason, the player cannot clearly grasp the presence of the wall provided in the special area, and the special selection port seems to have an opening length excluding the wall. In other words, the player performs a ball game while grasping a virtual opening length larger than the opening length that the special selection port actually has.

  If the virtual opening length of the special selection port is larger than the opening length of the normal selection port, it means that the player can grasp the special selection port larger than the normal selection port. For this reason, in the character lottery, an impression is given that the game balls are more easily received in the special selection port than in the normal selection port. In other words, the player can have a sense of expectation that a game ball is likely to win a special selection slot (that is, a special game is likely to occur), and can attract the player's interest in a lottery for a role, Decline in interest can be suppressed. On the other hand, in the case of pachinko halls, etc., it is possible to suppress the monetary loss due to the excessive occurrence of special games by making it difficult for the game balls to be accepted into the special selection slot more than the appearance. . That is, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game while balancing the balance between the player and the pachinko hall.

  The thin wall body has such a thickness that the player cannot clearly see it when viewed from the front, and the thickness of the wall body is 1/10 or less of the radial depth of the special selection port. It is preferable that Specifically, in the present embodiment, the radial depth of the special selection port (specific region 343 as the opening) is about 20 mm, whereas the thickness of the wall (wall 3431) is 1.3 to. 1.5 mm.

[Technology 2]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2 is
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1,
The prize drawing is
When the one game ball is supplied to the rotary accessory when the guide device and the normal area face each other, the one game ball is received in the normal selection port forming the normal area. As
When the one game ball is supplied to the rotary accessory when the guide device and the special area face each other, the one game ball is received by the special selection port forming the special area. It is characterized by being able to.

  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, when a single game ball is supplied to the rotary accessory when the guide device and the normal peripheral wall face each other, the game ball and the normal peripheral wall come into contact with each other, The game ball is received by a normal selection port formed on the opposite side of the normal peripheral wall in the rotation direction of the rotary accessory. On the other hand, when a single game ball is supplied to the rotary accessory when the guide device and the special peripheral wall face each other, the game ball and the special peripheral wall come into contact with each other, and the game ball is rotated by the rotary accessory. It is received in a special selection port formed on the side opposite to the special peripheral wall in the direction. Therefore, if a game ball is supplied to the rotary accessory when the guide device and the special peripheral wall face each other, it takes time until the one game ball is guided to the special selection port. Therefore, you can enjoy the joy of having a special game.

[Technology 3]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3 is
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2,
The opening length along the periphery of the rotary accessory and the opening length along the periphery of the normal selection port are substantially the same,
In the accessory lottery, although the special selection port and the normal selection port have substantially the same opening length, it is more difficult for the special selection port to accept a game ball than the normal selection port. It is characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the special selection port and the normal selection port each have substantially the same opening length along the periphery. Nevertheless, it is more difficult for the special selection port to accept the game ball than the normal selection port.

  By the way, in the case of a rotary type character with a special area as in the prior art, whether or not a game ball is easily received in the special selection port is generally determined by the opening length of the special selection port. The apparent size of the mouth was almost proportional to the acceptance probability.

  According to this technical idea, even though the special selection port and the normal selection port have substantially the same opening length, the special selection port is more difficult to accept the game ball than the normal selection port, and the special selection port is changed to the special selection port. The apparent acceptance probability and the actual acceptance probability can be easily made different. Further, when the special selection port and the normal selection port have substantially the same opening length, the player can grasp that the acceptance probability to the special selection port is substantially equal to the acceptance probability to the normal selection port. It will be. That is, at least the special selection port can give an impression that the game ball is more easily accepted than the normal selection port, and the expectation for the special game can be improved and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[Technology 4]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3,
The special selection port has an opening length along the periphery of the rotary accessory smaller than the opening width on the inner side of the periphery, and the opening width has a diameter larger than the periphery of the normal selection port. It is characterized by being formed larger than the opening width on the inside.

  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the opening length of the special selection port is smaller than the opening width, and the opening width is usually larger than the opening width of the selection port. Here, the opening length of the special selection port is smaller than the opening width because the normal peripheral wall adjacent to the special selection port extends toward the special selection port side on the side opposite to the rotation direction of the rotary type accessory. It is because it is formed. Thereby, the opening length of the special selection port is smaller than the opening width. In addition, it is preferable that the normal peripheral wall formed extending toward the special selection port side is a member that is difficult to visually recognize, such as a transparent member. This is because the game ball can be easily received in the special selection port. Note that “opening length” and “opening width” in this technical idea have different meanings. In other words, the “opening length” is expressed as the meaning of the opening length along the peripheral edge (outer peripheral surface), and the “opening width” is expressed as the meaning of the opening width in the portion on the inner diameter side of the peripheral edge. Yes.

  Thus, by making the opening length of the special selection port smaller than the opening width, the acceptance probability to the special selection port can be made smaller than apparent. In addition, by making the opening width of the special selection port larger than the opening width of the normal selection port, it is possible to make it seem that the special selection port accepts game balls more easily than the normal selection port in appearance. . In other words, it is possible to prevent the pachinko hall and the like from being damaged due to the excessive occurrence of special games, while giving the player an impression that the special selection opening is easier to enter than the normal selection opening and suppressing a decrease in interest. .

[Technology 5]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4,
The special selection port is formed such that the radial depth of the special selection port is larger than the radial depth of the normal selection port,
The special region is characterized in that the region length along the circumferential direction of the rotary accessory is formed to be smaller than the region length of the normal region.

  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, the area length of the special area is formed smaller than the area length of the normal area. That is, the length of the special peripheral wall along the circumferential direction of the rotary accessory is shorter than the length of the normal peripheral wall along the circumferential direction of the rotary accessory. Therefore, the time for which the guide device and the special peripheral wall face each other is shorter than the time for which the guide device and the normal peripheral wall face each other. Thereby, the probability of accepting a game ball to the normal selection port becomes smaller than the probability of accepting the game ball to the special selection port. Furthermore, since the radial depth of the special selection port is larger than the radial depth of the normal selection port, when the rotary accessory is viewed from the front, the area of the special selection port is the area of the normal selection port. Since it becomes larger than that, it is possible to reduce the impression that the game ball is difficult to be accepted in the special selection opening, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Note that a plurality of normal areas may be provided approximately equally between one special area and the special area where the guide device is opposed to the one special area. At this time, it is preferable that the wall widths of the respective normal peripheral walls for the plurality of normal regions are formed substantially uniformly. For example, when the number of normal selection ports is five and the number of special selection ports is one, the probability of accepting a game ball to the apparent special selection port is 1/6. Furthermore, the opening width of the special selection port is larger than the opening width of the normal selection port, and the depth of the special selection port in the radial direction is deeper than the depth of the normal selection port. The probability of accepting a game ball appears to be even higher than 1/6. However, since the wall width of the special peripheral wall for the special region is smaller than the wall width of each normal peripheral wall, the time for which the guide device and the special peripheral wall face each other is shorter than the time for which the guide device and the normal peripheral wall face each other. Therefore, the probability of accepting a game ball to the apparent special selection port is higher than the probability of accepting the game ball to the actual special selection port, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, “a special area and a special area in which the guide device is opposed to the one special area” is the same as a special area and the special area in which the guide device is opposed to the one special area. There may be other special areas. That is, when the number of the special selection openings provided on the periphery of the rotary accessory is one, “one special area” and “the special area where the guide device is opposed to the one special area in advance” "Is the same special area. On the other hand, when the number of special selection ports provided at the periphery of the mechanical lottery device is two or more, “one special area” and “a special device that the guide device is opposed to prior to the one special area” The “region” is a different special region.

[Technology 6]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 6 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 5,
The guide device includes:
Displacement between a holding position at which the game ball received by the opening / closing device can be held and a supply position at which the game ball received at the holding position can be raised and supplied to the rotary accessory Have possible carry-in pieces,
The guidance control means includes
While the carry-in piece is always maintained in the holding position, when the game ball is held in the holding position, the carry-in piece is displaced to the supply position, thereby supplying the game ball to the rotary accessory. It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 6, the carry-in piece (carry-in piece 341) of the guide device is opened and closed by being displaced from the holding position (receiving position) to the supply position (feeding position) by the guide control means. A game ball received by the device is supplied to the rotary accessory. That is, the game ball received by the opening / closing device is once held by the carry-in piece and then supplied to the rotary accessory at a predetermined timing. By the way, conventionally, aiming of the game ball to the special selection port is prevented by the rotation operation of the accessory, but the aiming cannot be completely prevented only by the rotation operation of the accessory. According to this technical idea, since the game ball is supplied to the rotary accessory by the operation of the carry-in piece, by appropriately adjusting the timing of operating the carry-in piece (for example, random), The timing at which game balls are supplied can be made difficult to predict. As a result, it is possible to prevent the aiming of the game ball to the special selection port and to prevent the occurrence of a large loss such as a pachinko hall.

  In addition, once the game ball received by the opening / closing device is held by the carry-in piece, in order to grasp when the game ball is supplied to the rotary accessory, the player can feel the tension of the carry-in piece. We will pay attention to the movement. From the viewpoint of the player, it is desirable that the game ball is supplied to the rotary accessory at a timing when the special area faces the portion where the game ball is supplied by the carry-in piece. Therefore, the closer the special area is to the carry-in piece, the higher the player's desire for the game ball to be supplied to the revolving game, so more attention is drawn to the game lottery. Reduction can be suppressed.

[Technology 7]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 7 is
In the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 6,
The rotary accessory is
A plurality of the special regions are provided at substantially equal intervals on the periphery of the rotary accessory,
A plurality of the normal areas are provided in the gaps between the two special areas adjacent to each other with respect to the plurality of special areas, at substantially equal intervals around the periphery of the rotary accessory.

  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 7, a plurality of special areas are provided at substantially equal intervals on the periphery of the rotary accessory, and a plurality of normal areas are provided at substantially equal intervals in the gaps of the special areas. Provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a large bias in the probability of accepting a game ball to the special selection port or the normal selection port due to the rotation position of the rotary type object for performing the character lottery, and to the special selection port by the player. It is possible to prevent the aiming of game balls, maintain the fairness of the game, and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In the present embodiment, three special areas are provided approximately evenly on the periphery of the rotary accessory, and five normal areas are provided approximately equally between two adjacent special areas. ing. That is, the rotary accessory has a configuration in which a total of 18 special regions and normal regions are arranged substantially evenly on the periphery. Under such a configuration, the apparent probability that a game ball will be received in the special selection port in the lottery of the bonus is about one-sixth, whereas a game ball is accepted in the special selection port in the bonus game. The actual probability is 1/10.

[Technology 8]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 8 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical thoughts 1 to 7,
An effect image display device for displaying a predetermined effect image is provided,
The game control means includes
Effect image storage means for storing at least a plurality of effect images each having a different time until a specific image is displayed as the effect image displayed on the effect image display device;
In response to winning the effect image displayed on the effect image display device in the internal lottery process performed based on the detection of the reception of the game ball to the entrance by the entrance detection means, Effect image selection determining means for selecting and determining any one of the plurality of effect images stored in the effect image storage means without biasing to any effect image;
Effect image display control means for controlling display so that at least the effect image selected and determined by the effect image selection determining means is displayed on the effect image display device;
Have
The guide device supplies only one of the game balls received from the opening / closing device to the rotary accessory after a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening / closing device as the specific timing is displaced to the opening mode. With
The one game ball is selected from the plurality of effect images only when the effect image is selected and determined as one effect image based on the detection of the reception of the game ball to the entrance by the entrance detection means. It is possible to be supplied to the rotary accessory so that it can be won by lottery.

  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 8, the effect image storage means (ROM storing the tables 1 to 43) is a specific image as an effect image displayed on the effect image display device (effect display device 115). A plurality of effect images having different times until is displayed are stored. In other words, the plurality of effect images stored by the effect image storage unit have different effect times. For example, when there are a first effect image, a second effect image,..., A tenth effect image and 10 effect images, the effect time of the second effect image and the effect of the first effect image. The time difference between the effect time of 400 ms, the effect time of the third effect image and the effect time of the second effect image is 400 ms,..., The effect time of the tenth effect image and the effect of the ninth effect image This is the case where the time difference from the time is 400 ms.

  The reception of the game ball at the reception port is detected by the reception port detection means, and based on this, an internal lottery process is performed by the lottery device. When the internal lottery process is won, the effect image displayed on the effect image display device is selected from the effect images stored in the effect image storage means without being biased to any effect image. One of the effect images is selected and determined by the determining means (step S8604). The effect image display control means (special symbol image display control means 632) performs display control so that the effect image selected and determined is displayed on the effect image display device. Here, “without biasing to an arbitrary effect image” means that, with probability, a plurality of effect images are all selected and determined universally, and there is no intentional bias. To do. However, this does not exclude bias that may occur within the probability range.

  In addition, when the internal lottery process is won, the opening / closing device that is always maintained in the closed mode is displaced to the open mode by the open / close control unit after the effect image is displayed, and then the open / close control unit again. Displaced in a closed manner. Here, “the opening / closing device is displaced to the open mode by the opening / closing control means after the effect image is displayed” means that the display device is displaced to the open mode after the display of the effect image is started, or A mode in which the display is displaced to the open mode after the display is completed corresponds to this. However, the opening / closing control means does not make the opening / closing device open when the specific image is displayed on the effect image display device. As a result, the opening / closing control device becomes open after the specific image is displayed. It is. Specifically, the timing of the timer for setting the opening / closing device to the opening mode is not started when a specific image is displayed, but the timing of the timer for setting the opening / closing device to the opening mode is produced, for example. Starts when an image display command is issued. In addition, the timer for setting the opening / closing device to open may be started immediately after determining the result of the internal lottery process.

  When a game ball is received when the opening / closing device is in the open mode, only one of the game balls is supplied to the rotary accessory at a specific timing. In other words, even if a plurality of game balls are received by the opening / closing device, only one ball is guided to the rotary accessory. Therefore, since it is only necessary to accept one game ball when the switchgear is in the open mode, it is fair even for advanced players with skills that can accept many game balls in the switchgear. Sexuality can be secured. Moreover, even if it becomes slow to notice that the opening / closing device has become open due to looking away, for example, it is only necessary to accept only one game ball in the opening / closing device, so that the game can be played with peace of mind without panicking. be able to. It should be noted that the specific timing is a timing after a certain time has elapsed since the opening / closing device is displaced to the open state. “After a certain period of time has elapsed since the opening / closing device has been displaced to the open state” means that a certain amount of time has elapsed since the opening / closing device has been displaced to the open state. The opportunity to be supplied to the object does not have to be that the switchgear is displaced in the open mode. Therefore, if the time from when the opening / closing device is displaced to the opening state is constant, it means that “after a certain time has elapsed since the opening / closing device is displaced to the opening state”.

  By the way, a single game ball guided by the rotary type object is used only when the effect image displayed on the effect image display device is selected and determined as one effect image from a plurality of effect images. It can be supplied to the rotary combination so that it can be won in the lottery. In other words, a winning combination is made only when a single effect image is selected from a plurality of effect images. Therefore, the probability that a special game will occur does not change depending on the skill of the player, and a gaming machine that ensures fairness for any player can be provided.

[Technology 9]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 9 is
In the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 8,
The opening / closing control means displays the opening / closing device that is always maintained in the closing mode in response to winning the internal lottery process after the specific image included in the effect image is displayed. It is displaced so as to be an open mode,
The rotary type object is a mechanical type lottery so that it is won when a game ball is supplied at a winning timing that changes every certain time,
Each of the plurality of effect images has a different time by a predetermined time until the specific image is displayed on the effect image display device.

  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 9, the opening / closing device is opened after a specific image included in the effect image is displayed. However, as described above, the opening / closing control means does not open the opening / closing device when the specific image is displayed on the effect image display device, and as a result, after the specific image is displayed. This is an open mode. The “specific image” corresponds to, for example, an image indicating that the internal lottery process has been won or an image indicating that the opening / closing device is in an open state.

  In addition, the rotary combination is subjected to a mechanical lottery process (a combination lottery) so that a winning combination is obtained when a game ball is supplied at a winning timing that changes every certain time. Here, “timing to change at regular intervals” means timing to change only at regular intervals. For example, the first winning timing starting from a certain point in time is lost after 2000 ms, the second winning timing is lost after 1000 ms from the first winning timing, and the third winning timing is 1000 ms after the second winning timing. In such a case, the winning timing will be lost every 2000 ms corresponding to a certain time, but this is not the case in the above technical idea.

  As a specific aspect of the rotary combination, for example, a rotary lottery device in which a special selection port that is selected when a game ball is received is formed. A mode that rotates so as to be possible only corresponds to. At this time, as long as the winning timing is changed only at certain time intervals, the rotary accessory need not rotate at a constant speed. Further, as another aspect, a gap is formed between the opening / closing device and the rotary accessory so that a game ball received from the opening / closing device cannot reach the rotary accessory. A mode in which the game ball can reach the rotary accessory by closing the gap only at each time is equivalent. Furthermore, for example, an opening / closing device referred to as an “electrical chew” that is always in a closed state and only in an open state at certain time intervals may be used.

  In addition, the plurality of effect images stored in the effect image storage means are each one of the game balls received from the opening / closing device in accordance with the effect image selected and determined, and are guided to the rotary-type accessory. In order to change the timing, the time until a specific image is displayed on the effect image display device is different by a predetermined time (for example, 400 ms). For example, when there are a first effect image, a second effect image,..., A tenth effect image and 10 effect images, the effect time of the second effect image and the effect of the first effect image. The time difference between the effect time of 400 ms, the effect time of the third effect image and the effect time of the second effect image is 400 ms,..., The effect time of the tenth effect image and the effect of the ninth effect image The time difference with time is 400 ms, which are all different by the same fixed time.

  On the other hand, the time from when the opening / closing device is displaced to the open state until one gaming ball of the gaming balls received from the opening / closing device is supplied to the rotary accessory is constant. Therefore, if the time from the start of displaying the effect image to the time when the specific image is displayed on the effect image display device is different, one game ball out of the game balls received from the opening / closing device becomes a rotary accessory. The supplied timing will be different.

  In this way, the time from the start of display of the effect image to the display of the winning image differs according to the effect image selected and determined, and one game ball out of the game balls received from the opening / closing device is Since the time until it is guided to the rotary combination is constant, the timing at which the one game ball is guided to the rotary combination varies depending on the effect image selected and determined. Since the display of the effect image starts as soon as the game ball is received at the entrance, the time from when the game ball is received at the entrance until the winning image is displayed is also selected and determined. Depending on it. In other words, whether or not one of the game balls received from the opening / closing device is supplied to the rotary accessory at the winning timing is determined after the display of the effect image is started. It depends on the time until the image is selected, and thus on which effect image is selected and determined. It is not essential that the display of the effect image is started as soon as the game ball is received at the entrance, and the time from when the game ball is received at the entrance until the display of the effect image starts is selected and determined. What is necessary is just to be constant irrespective of the effect image.

[Technology 10]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 10 is
In the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 9,
When an effect image that can be supplied to the rotary accessory within a specified time when the game ball is supplied by the guidance control means serving as the winning timing for the one game ball is selected as the winning effect image ,
The fixed time corresponds to a value obtained by multiplying the number of the plurality of effect images by the predetermined time, and the specific time is substantially the same as the predetermined time, whereby the game ball is received at the receiving port. Regardless of the timing, the ratio of the winning effect image to the plurality of effect images is substantially the same as the ratio of the specific time to the certain time.

According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 10, the certain time during which the winning timing is shifted corresponds to a value obtained by multiplying the number of the plurality of effect images by the predetermined time. The specific time is substantially the same as the predetermined time. For example, if the winning timing is different every 4000 ms, the number of effect images is 10 and the predetermined time is 400 ms, the specific time is 400 ms. Further, when expressed by a mathematical expression, a certain time is T [ms], the number of effect images is N [number], a predetermined time is Δs [ms], a specific time is t [ms], and the number of winning effect images is one. In this case, it is a requirement that both the following equations 1 and 2 are satisfied.
[Formula 1] T≈N × Δs
[Formula 2] t≈Δs

When both the above formulas 1 and 2 are established, a value obtained by dividing 1 (the number of winning effect images) by the number of effect images (for example, 1/10) and a ratio of a specific time to a certain time ( For example, 1/10) is almost the same time. As a result, the opening / closing device can be used only when one effect image is selected and determined from among the plurality of effect images, unless the effect image selection determining unit intentionally deviates to any effect image. Among the game balls accepted from the game, one game ball will be guided to the rotary accessory at the winning timing. That is, the following relational expression 3 is established.
[Formula 3] 1 / N = t / T
Therefore, regardless of the timing of accepting the game ball at the reception port, the ratio of the winning effect image to the plurality of effect images and the ratio of the specific time to a certain time are substantially the same. Therefore, since the probability that a special game will occur does not change depending on the skill of the player, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that ensures fairness for any player.

  By the way, the “one effect image” which is the winning timing is determined by the mode of the rotary combination when the game ball is received at the reception entrance. For example, when it is assumed that the winning timing is shifted only every 4000 ms and one of the game balls received from the opening / closing device is supplied to the rotary accessory 4000 ms after the specific image is displayed, If the effect time (the time from the start of the display of the effect display until the specific image is displayed) is an integral multiple of 4000 ms, the one game ball is supplied to the rotary combination at the winning timing. It will be. In this way, since each of the plurality of effect images has a different time from when the display of the effect image starts until the specific image is displayed, the winning timing differs depending on the effect image selected and determined. . Therefore, regardless of the timing of accepting the game balls at the entrance, the probability that one of the game balls received from the opening / closing device will be supplied to the rotary accessory at the winning timing is 1 for a plurality of effects. It is a value divided by the number of images (specifically, the number of effect images that can be selected and determined by effect image selection determining means). That is, if the number of the plurality of effect images is 10, one game ball out of the game balls received from the opening / closing device is supplied to the rotary combination at the winning timing with a probability of 1/10. It will be. Therefore, since the probability that a special game will occur does not change depending on the skill of the player, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that ensures fairness for any player.

  Also, since the number of winning images is always one, the number of effect images does not increase suddenly, which not only facilitates the design of the gaming machine, but also the ROM for storing the image data of the effect images. There is no need to increase the capacity.

  The “winning timing” means a specific time when a game ball is supplied by the guidance control means. The “specific time” means a certain length of time that can be won when one of the game balls received from the switchgear is supplied to the rotary accessory.

[Technology 11]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 11 is
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 9 or 10,
A portion where the guide device and the special region or the normal region face each other is configured to be visible,
The winning timing is when the guide device and the special area face each other.

  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 11, when a single game ball is supplied to the rotary accessory when the guide device and the special area face each other, a mechanical lottery process (an accessory lottery) ) Result is won. In addition, since the portion where the guide device and the special region or the normal region face each other (that is, the portion where the guide device and the peripheral edge of the rotary accessory face each other) is configured to be visible, 1 is supplied to the guide device. It is possible to predict to some extent whether or not a game ball of a ball is supplied at a winning timing. And when the possibility that the prediction coincides with the winning timing is high, the player's mood is enhanced, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[Technology 12]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 12 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical thoughts 1 to 11,
It is further provided with an electrical decoration device that is provided in the vicinity of the gaming area or / and the gaming area and performs an auxiliary effect,
The game board comprises a game board having an opening and having the game area,
The effect image display device has an image display area that can be visually recognized through the opening, is behind the game board with a predetermined gap, and is a display surface of the game board and the image display area. And are arranged so as to be substantially parallel,
The rotary combination is provided on the rear surface of the game board so that an effect image displayed in the image display area and a mode in which the single game ball is received by the rotary combination can be observed simultaneously. In the vicinity of the effect image display device, the image display area is arranged so as to overlap with a part of the image display area.

  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 12, the electrical decoration device (the electrical decoration body 129) is provided in the gaming area or / and in the vicinity of the gaming area. In this electrical decoration device, for example, a lighting effect is performed when a special game can occur or during a special game, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player. The game board 5 includes a game board (game board 5a), and an opening (opening 124) and a game area are formed in the game board. The effect image display device has an image display area (image display area 1150) that can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the game board, and is behind the game board with a predetermined gap. In addition, the game board and the display surface of the image display area are arranged substantially in parallel. The reason why the game board and the display surface of the image display area are substantially parallel is to allow the game area where the game ball flows down and the effect image displayed in the image display area to be viewed simultaneously. .

  By the way, as described above, the lottery result by the rotary accessory (rotary sorting device 294) indicates that one game ball out of the game balls received from the opening / closing device (big prize opening unit 146) is the rotary accessory. It is influenced by the timing when it is supplied. That is, in the process until the special game is generated, there is a close relationship between the display on the effect image display device (effect display device 115) and the operation of the rotary accessory (specifically, the timing when the winning timing is adjusted). Relevant. Therefore, it is not sufficient to visually recognize only one of them, and the fun of the game is exhibited by visually recognizing both. Accordingly, among the game balls received from the opening / closing device by being placed on the rear surface of the game board 5a and in the vicinity of the effect image display device (effect display device 115) so as to overlap with a part of the image display area. It is possible to simultaneously observe the manner in which one game ball is received by the rotary combination. Thereby, the monotony of the game in the process until a special game is generated can be eliminated, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which an effect image display device and an accessory are stacked, but in this case, the effect image display device is arranged behind the game board, while the accessory is arranged on the game board side. It had been. That is, since there is a distance in the depth direction between the effect image display device and the accessory, it is difficult to gaze at both. Further, the conventional accessory has a function as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation as if it was won in the lottery, and performs an effect effect together with the effect on the effect image display device. It was a thing. That is, if any one of the effects and the effect effects in the effect image display device can be visually recognized, it is possible to grasp the process until the lottery result is derived. In addition, although there is a lottery that does not have a function as a production, such a gaming machine can grasp the process until the lottery result is derived by viewing only the bonus I was able to. On the other hand, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) according to the present technical idea has an internal lottery process related to the effect image displayed in the image display area 1150 and a rotary accessory (rotation) until the special game is generated. There is a close relationship with the lottery by the formula sorter 294). Therefore, since both of them can be observed at the same time, it is possible to suppress the distraction of the concentration of the player with respect to the game.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine described in the present technical idea, the lottery result by the rotary type object depends on the timing of accepting the game ball to the rotary type object, so that it is only possible to watch both of them. The process by which the lottery result is derived can be grasped. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by allowing both to be watched.

  In addition, since the rotary combination is arranged in the vicinity of the effect image display device on the rear surface of the game board so as to overlap a part of the image display area, there is a sense of perspective between the image display area and the rotary combination. It will be resolved. Thereby, it becomes possible to visually recognize the display image in the image display area and the operation of the rotary type object at the same time, and it is possible to further eliminate the monotony of the game in the process until the special game is generated, and to suppress the decrease in the interest.

  Note that “in the vicinity of the image display device” in which the rotary combination is arranged means that it is on the side of the effect image display device in the depth direction.

[Technology 13]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 13 is
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 12,
The rotary combination is arranged on the rear side of the game board and straddling the inside of the game area and the outside of the game area.

  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 13, the rotary type accessory can be enlarged without being limited to the space in the gaming area. In particular, there is an advantage in that the rotational speed can be reduced by increasing the diameter of the rotary accessory. In other words, since the rotary combination is a circular shape in which a plurality of regions (here, the specific region 343 and the normal region 344) are provided along the peripheral direction, if the rotational speed is high, the game ball It is difficult to visually recognize the mode accepted in these regions. However, as described above, by placing the rotary combination across the inside of the game area and the outside of the game area, it is possible to increase the diameter without being limited by the diameter of the rotary combination. Can reduce the rotation speed. In addition, since the space of the game area is not reduced by the rotary type object, the game area can be used effectively.

  In the present embodiment, the game area 37 is defined by the outer rail 76. Therefore, “inside the game area” means an inner area defined by the outer rail 76 in a front view. More specifically, it refers to a region sandwiched between the opening 124 and the outer rail 76 in a front view. The “outside of the game area” is an outer area defined by the outer rail 76 in front view, and more specifically, an area in which the front component member 79 is formed in front view.

[Technology 14]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 14 is
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 13,
At least two of the special areas are provided on the periphery of the rotary accessory,
The rotary combination has a viewable area that can be seen inside the game area, and at least one special area of the two or more special areas is always visible in the viewable area. It is comprised so that it may become.

  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 14, the special area always appears in the visually recognizable area (visible area 294a) of the rotary accessory, so that the opening / closing apparatus can be opened at any timing. It is possible to continue to have a sense of expectation that the game balls received from will always be accepted by the rotary combination at the winning timing.

[Technology 15]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 15 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical thoughts 12 to 14,
A rolling passage is provided in which a game ball received from the opening and closing device can roll;
The rolling passage is formed of a transparent member so that a game ball received from the opening / closing device can be visually recognized.

  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 15, since the game ball rolling in the rolling passage (guide passage 340) can be visually recognized, it is possible to grasp the process until the game ball is guided to the rotary accessory. Therefore, when the game ball rolls in the rolling path, it can be felt that the game ball is accepted by the rotary combination at the winning timing, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[Configuration 16]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 16 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical thoughts 12 to 15,
The image display area is a rectangle that can display a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols and has a horizontal direction as a longitudinal direction,
The game control means includes
Having a design image display control means for performing display control of the plurality of designs,
The symbol image display control means arranges a plurality of symbol rows along the longitudinal direction, and the symbols constituting the symbol row become longer than the length in the longitudinal direction over the entire variable display period. It has a pattern variation control means for controlling display so as to move in the direction.

  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 16, the symbol image display control means (normal symbol image display control means 631) performs display control so that a plurality of symbol rows are arranged along the longitudinal direction, and the symbol is displayed. Symbol variation control means (ordinary symbol image display control means 631) for performing display control so that the symbols constituting the column are moved in a direction longer than the length of the rectangle in the longitudinal direction over the entire variation display period. Have. `` A direction that is longer than the length of the rectangle in the longitudinal direction '' means a direction in which the movement length of the plurality of symbol rows is longer than the length of the rectangle in the longitudinal direction when performing variable display of the symbol rows To do. For example, the direction (diagonal direction) intersecting the long side of the rectangle or the direction of drawing an arc corresponds.

  In addition, since the length in the direction of variation of the symbol becomes longer, the number of symbols displayed can be increased. Furthermore, the size of the symbol can be increased, and a powerful variation display of the symbol can be performed. Moreover, it is preferable that the plurality of symbols displayed in the image display area are all displayed in at least three symbols in the symbol variation direction (movement direction) for each symbol row. Note that “all symbols” corresponds to all the numbers when the symbols are displayed only in numbers. In addition, when a numeral and a decorative symbol displayed around the numeral are displayed, all of the numeral and the decorative symbol correspond. Therefore, since the variable display of the symbols can be displayed in an unprecedented manner, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Note that “over the entire period of the variable display period” means the entire period from the start of the variable display of the symbol to the end of the variable display. That is, it means a period from the end of the previous variation display to the complete stop of all symbols by the end of the variation display after the start of the present variation display. Therefore, for example, if the temporary display is temporarily stopped after the symbol change display is started, and the change display is started again after the temporary stop, the symbol change display which is the operation before the temporary stop is displayed. The entire period from the start to the stop of the symbol, which is the operation after the temporary stop, corresponds to this.

[Technology 17]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 17 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical thoughts 12 to 16,
In the image display area, an area including one corner of the image display area and a corner adjacent to the corner opposite to the one corner is part of the image display area. And a visible region visible through the opening.

  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 17, the image display area is covered with a rotary accessory (the hidden area 1150b), and the visible area (visible area 1150a) that can be visually recognized through the opening. Have Thereby, it becomes possible to visually recognize the image display area and the rotary combination, and it is possible to further watch the image display area and the rotary combination simultaneously. In addition, when there is an area that is not displayed in the image display area, it is not only unnatural, but there is a problem that the area that is not displayed becomes anxious in the process of playing a game, and it becomes impossible to concentrate on the game. However, according to the present technical idea, by covering a part (that is, an area in which no image is displayed) with a rotary-type accessory, the above-mentioned problem can be solved and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. There is also an advantage that it is not necessary to purchase a non-generic image display area.

[Technology 18]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 18 is
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 17,
The symbol image display control means controls display of a plurality of symbol strings in the visible region.

  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 18, in the image display area, even if there is an area to be crushed, the design is displayed in the visible area, so that the display result by the design can be easily grasped. Can be suppressed.

[Technology 19]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 19 is
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 17 or 18,
The symbol image display control means performs display control so that a symbol sequence closest to the covering area among the plurality of symbol sequences is displayed smallest among the plurality of symbol sequences.

  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 19, since the symbol row closest to the cover area is displayed smallest, a plurality of symbol rows can be displayed while the image display region has the cover region. . Further, it is possible to give a sense of perspective to the display in the image display area, and to give a three-dimensional image to the player.

  By the way, the “game machine” described in the above technical idea corresponds to the “pachinko machine 1” of the present embodiment. The “game area” described in the technical idea corresponds to the “game area 37” in the present embodiment. The “game board” described in the technical idea corresponds to the “game board 5” of the present embodiment. The “accepting entrance” described in the above technical idea corresponds to the “special symbol start opening 82” of the present embodiment. The “opening / closing device” described in the above technical idea corresponds to the “big prize opening unit 146” of the present embodiment. The “rotary accessory” described in the technical idea corresponds to the “rotary sorting device 294” of the present embodiment. The “guidance device” described in the technical idea corresponds to the “game ball carry-in device 380” of the present embodiment. The “game control means” described in the above technical idea corresponds to any of the “main control board 765”, “sub-integrated board 763”, and “liquid crystal control board 758” of the present embodiment. The “acceptor detecting means” described in the above technical idea corresponds to the “special symbol per-determination random number extracting means 611” of the present embodiment. The “lottery means” described in the above technical idea corresponds to the “special symbol success / failure judging means 612” of the present embodiment. The “opening / closing control means” described in the above technical idea corresponds to the “big prize opening opening / closing mechanism 335” of the present embodiment. The “guidance control means” described in the technical idea corresponds to the “distribution device driving mechanism 336” of the present embodiment. The “object lottery determination unit” described in the technical idea corresponds to the “special symbol determination unit 612” of the present embodiment. The “special game execution means” described in the above technical idea corresponds to the “big hit game execution means 618” of the present embodiment. The “normal area” described in the technical idea corresponds to the “normal area 344” of the present embodiment. The “special area” described in the technical idea corresponds to the “specific area 343” of the present embodiment. The “wall body” described in the technical idea corresponds to the “wall 3431” of the present embodiment. The “carrying piece” described in the technical idea corresponds to the “carrying piece 341” of the present embodiment. The “effect display device” described in the technical idea corresponds to the “effect display device 115” of the present embodiment. The “effect image storage means” described in the technical idea corresponds to the “ROM for storing the tables 1 to 43” in the present embodiment. The “effect image selection determining means” described in the technical idea corresponds to “step S8604” of the present embodiment. The “effect image display control means” described in the technical idea corresponds to the “special symbol image display control means 632” of the present embodiment. The “lighting device” described in the technical idea corresponds to the “lighting body 129” of the present embodiment. The “game board” described in the above technical idea corresponds to the “game board 5a” of the present embodiment. The “opening” described in the above technical idea corresponds to the “opening 124” in the present embodiment. The “image display area” described in the technical idea corresponds to the “image display area 1150” of the present embodiment. The “rolling passage” described in the technical idea corresponds to the “guide passage 340” of the present embodiment. The “symbol image display control means” and the “symbol fluctuation control means” described in the technical idea correspond to the “normal symbol image display control means 631” of the present embodiment. The “visible region” described in the technical idea corresponds to the “visible region 1150a” in the present embodiment. The “cover area” described in the technical idea corresponds to the “hidden area 1150b” of the present embodiment.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but if a symbol is displayed, a gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a pachislot machine, or a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine or the like.

  In other words, a pachinko machine is a game in which an input medium such as a game ball that is a medium that a player inserts into the game machine and a game medium that is a medium used for a substantial game performed by the player are the same. This is a type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball that has been inserted. Specifically, “a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a number of obstacle nails, center objects, display means, etc. A game area provided with an appropriate entrance for a game ball such as a mouth, a passage opening, an arrival opening, etc., a rail for guiding the game ball from the launching device to the game area, and a game ball guided to the game area It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entrance to the entrance and according to the entrance mode of the game balls to a plurality of entrances.

  There are various types of pachinko machines, which are generally represented by what is referred to as “digipachi”, “entrance state detection means for detecting the entrance state to the entrance (ie, game state) Detection means), lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a ball is detected by the entrance state detection means, and special symbol display means for changing the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the fluctuation. Or “additional effect image display means for displaying a decorative symbol sequence composed of a plurality of decorative symbols and causing characters or the like to appear at a predetermined timing” , Which is generally represented by what is referred to as a “multi-function machine”, comprising a lottery means for performing lottery by distributing game balls in an accessory and lottery means for performing lottery by winning at the start opening. ”, Represented by what is generally called“ Alepatchi ”“ For example, one game is played with a predetermined number of game balls, such as 16 games, and the game balls are placed in a plurality of entrances in one game. In accordance with this, “a payout of a predetermined number of game balls” can be exemplified.

  On the other hand, with a pachislot machine, a medal that is a game medium is inserted, and after inserting the medal, a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the operation of the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). It is a slot machine with a stop operation function that performs a substantial game of stopping the fluctuation of the symbol sequence in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time of stopping the variation of the symbol row satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large amount of medals. In addition, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated. In this case, for example, the present invention can be applied as long as a symbol for performing an effect or the like is displayed on an image display device including a liquid crystal display or the like.

  In addition, a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined is a plurality of (for example, five) game balls that are used as one unit of input medium. ) Is variably displayed in accordance with the operation of), and thereafter, the variation of the symbol string is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time when the variation of the symbol sequence is stopped satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large number of medals. In this case, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, it seems that there is no gaming medium at first glance in a gaming machine that does not play a substantial game depending on the inserted medium, such as a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused However, even with such a gaming machine, it can be assumed that the game content played using a game ball or other appropriate article is included in the entire game content. Therefore, even such a gaming machine can be a target of a gaming machine in which a game is played using a gaming medium.

  In addition, the effect display device 115 in the above-described embodiment is preferably a liquid crystal display device, but is not necessarily limited to a liquid crystal display device. It may be a display device such as an EL display device, a plasma display device, and a CRT. That is, the mode is not limited as long as the symbols can be variably displayed.

It is a perspective view which shows the state by which the main body frame was opened by the one side of the outer frame of a pachinko machine, and the front frame was opened by the one side of the main body frame. It is a front view which shows the whole front side of a pachinko machine. It is an enlarged front view which shows a game area | region. It is a perspective view which isolate | separates the main body frame and game board of a pachinko machine, and shows from diagonally upper right front. It is a rear view which shows the whole rear side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the whole rear side of a pachinko machine from upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the back cover, various control boards, etc. from the perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state by which various members were assembled | attached to the main body frame of the pachinko machine from diagonally upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows a main-body frame simple substance from diagonally upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows the game board with which various control board boxes were mounted | worn from lower right back. It is a perspective view which shows a game area | region from the upper right front. It is a front view which shows a display apparatus frame. It is a perspective view which shows the state which isolate | separated the front unit and the rear unit of the display apparatus frame from the upper right front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which isolate | separated each structure in a front unit from the upper right front. It is a perspective view which shows a front unit from the upper left front. It is a perspective view which shows a front unit from upper right back. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which isolate | separated each structure in a rear unit from the upper right front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the opening / closing mechanism of a movable piece. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which isolate | separated each structure of the opening-and-closing member drive mechanism from upper left back. It is a top view which shows a composite rolling distribution apparatus. It is sectional drawing in AA of a composite rolling distribution apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of an understage electrical decoration. It is a perspective view which shows a rotary distribution apparatus from the upper left front. It is a front view which shows a rotary distribution device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the rotary body and the carrying-in piece from the rotary distribution device. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which isolate | separated each structure of the rotary distribution device from the upper left front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which isolate | separated each structure of the rotary distribution apparatus from upper left back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the internal structure of a rotary distribution device. It is a front view which shows a special starting port unit. It is a perspective view which shows a special starting port unit from the upper right front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which isolate | separated each structure of the special starting port unit from upper left back. It is the cutting | disconnection perspective view which cut | disconnected the special starting port unit to the vertical direction. It is a front view which shows a winning opening unit. It is a perspective view which shows a winning opening unit from the upper right front. It is sectional drawing which shows the BB cross section in FIG. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine is shown as a block diagram. It is a functional block diagram which shows roughly the functional structure of a main board | substrate and a peripheral board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 38. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball command and a self-check command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an ACK signal input determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st game process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st start detection process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st lottery / change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st lottery fluctuation display pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st winning thing action | operation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd game process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd start detection process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd lottery / change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd lottery fluctuation display pattern setting process. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selected in a 2nd fluctuation display pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd small hitting thing action | operation process. It is a time chart which shows the operating principle of the detection timer of a winning opening sensor, a solenoid, and a rotary distribution device which detects that a special ball, a big winning opening, and a game ball won a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd jackpot opening process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory big hit control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control side. 60 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control side power-on processing of FIG. 59. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control side power-on process following FIG. 60. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the number-of-use prize ball stock number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stock monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout ball removal determination setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball removal setting process. It is a prize ball number information table which shows an example of the command regarding payout. It is a table which shows an example of a status command. It is a table which shows an example of the shaping state command which shaped the state command. The contents of the control processing in the sub-integrated substrate and the control processing in the liquid crystal control substrate are shown. It is a figure for demonstrating the display area displayed on an effect display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation concerning a normal symbol success / failure determination means. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation concerning a normal symbol success / failure determination means. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation concerning a special symbol success / failure determination means. It is a figure which shows the effect concerning a lottery drawing. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the display mode of the special symbol at the time of a small hit, and the rotation operation of a rotary sorter. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the display mode of the special symbol at the time of a small hit, and the rotation operation of a rotary sorter. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the display mode of the special symbol at the time of a small hit, and the rotation operation of a rotary sorter. It is a figure which shows about the display mode of a special symbol, the rotation operation | movement of a rotary sorter, and the operation | movement of a carry-in piece when the display mode of "stop at" 1st phrase "" is selected and determined at the time of a small hit. It is a figure which shows about the display mode of a special symbol, the rotation operation | movement of a rotary sorter, and the operation | movement of a carry-in piece when the display mode of "stop at" 1st phrase "" is selected and determined at the time of a small hit.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 1a Prepaid card unit 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Front frame 5 Game board 5a Game board 6 Lower receiving plate 7 Hinge mechanism 11 Front frame body 12 Game board mounting frame 13 Mechanism mounting body 14 Outer frame side hinge tool 15 Main body Frame side hinge device 16 Speaker box portion 17 Speaker mounting plate 18 Speaker 19 Launch rail 21 Compound rolling distribution device 22 First rolling area 23 Second rolling area 24 Specific outlet 25 Normal outlet 26 Specific outlet path 27 Normal outlet path 28 Stepped portion 30 Lower front plate 31 Lower plate 32 Operation handle 33 Ash tray 34 Ball discharge lever 36 Hinge mechanism 37 Game area 38 Open window 39 Window frame 40 Partition plate 41 Outer wall 42 Stage left margin 43 Right canopy 44 Warp exit 45 Approach path 46 Lamp driving substrate 50 Transparent plate 51 Upper plate 52 Side decoration device 53 Acoustic illumination device 54 Side decoration body 55 56 Transparent cover body 57 Speaker 58 Speaker cover 60 Warp passage 61 Floodlight decoration body 62 Outflow part 63 Warp inflow port 65 Main control board 70 Locking device 71 Locking tool 72 Body frame locking hook 73 Closing tool 74 Door locking hook 75 Cylinder lock 76 Outer rail 77 Inner rail 78 Guide rail 78a Launch port 79 Front component 81 Ordinary electric accessory 82 Special symbol start port 83 Lower side big prize port 84 LED
85 LED
86 LED
87 LED
90 Ball out port 91 Center accessory 96 Normal symbol start port 98 Attacker device 99 Opening / closing member 100 Under-stage illumination 101 Lens 102 Reflector 103 Circular notch 104 LED substrate 105 Count switch 106 Rotation angle switch 107 Full switch 108 Dispensing relay substrate 115 Production Display Device 117 Display Device Control Board Box 118 Box Mount 120 Front Unit 121 Rear Unit 123 Guide Wall 124 Opening 125 Decoration Frame 129 Electric Control Body 130 Sub Control Board Box 132 Main Control Board Box 133 Tank Mounting Section 134 Rail Mounting portion 135 Dispensing device mounting portion 136 Ball tank 137 Bottom plate portion 138 Discharge port 139 Rail component 140 Expansion opening 141 Large winning opening 142 Moving piece 143 Upper lid 144 Receiving portion 145 Middle frame 146 Large winning Unit 147 Game ball detecting means 148 Solenoid support part 150 Tank rail 151 Front wall part 152 Rear wall part 155 Rail shelf 156 Rectifier 157 Shaft 158 Rail receiving part 160 Big winning opening opening / closing drive means 161 Solenoid 162 Plunger 163 Link arm 164 Link Shaft 170 Ball delivery device 172 Delivery motor 173 Opening 192 Launch motor 193 Mounting substrate 194 Launch device 195 Power supply board 196 Power supply board box 198 Delivery control board box 210 Cover 210 Rear cover body 211 Cover hinge mechanism 212 Rear wall 213 Circumferential wall 213a Wall part 213b Wall part 213c Upper side wall part 214 Hinge body 215 Hinge pin 216 Hinge body 217 Elastic closing body 218 Inspection connector 230 Heat radiation hole 231 Heat radiation hole 232 Heat radiation hole 233 Heat radiation hole 235 Sealing 237 Code holder 238 Distribution board 239 Board connector 252 Interface board 253 Lower plate ball derivative 254 Board box 271 Discharge path unit 272 Left start port discharge path 273 Right discharge path unit 274 Sorting apparatus discharge path 276 Step 291 Opening 292 Rear frame 294 Rotary sorter 294a Visible area 296 Large winning opening attachment base 297 Rotating body 300 Back plate 301 Side plate 302 Decoration body 302 Large winning opening attachment window 313 Discharge sensor 317 First start opening sensor 318 First 2 Start-up sensor 319 Count sensor 322 Special holding ball lamp 323 Normal holding ball lamp 330 Winning port sensor 331 V Winning sensor 332 Special symbol display 333 Normal symbol display 334 Normal symbol drive mechanism 335 Large winning port opening / closing mechanism 336 Device drive mechanism 3 39 Attacker drive mechanism 340 Guide passage 341 Loading piece 342 Rotating body case 343 Specific region 344 Normal region 346 Outer wall 347 Inlet 348 Discharge port 349 Rotating body receiving surface 360 Specific outlet 361 Normal outlet 362 Rotation position sensor 363 Rotation position detection plate 364 Rotating shaft 365 Substrate 366 Decorative plate 367 Window portion 368 Rotation drive gear 369 Rotating body motor 371 External terminal plate 372 Firing control substrate 380 Game ball loading device 381 LED substrate 382 Rotating body back cover 383 Middle frame 384 Game ball detecting means 385 Game ball Detection means 386 Game ball detection means 387 First outflow path 388 Second outflow path 389 Third outflow path 394 Decoration lamp 395 Effect lamp 396 Prize ball lamp 397 Gradation lamp 400 Solenoid 401 Plunger 402 Link arm 403 Sorting device drive sensor 40 4 Link shaft 405 Rotating body drive means 433 Normal symbol variation control means 499 Winning slot unit 500 Normal winning slot 501 Winning path 502 Normal winning device 506 Top slope 507 Distributing protrusion 508 Obstacle nail 508a Right obstruction nail 508b Left obstruction nail 510 base plate 511 nail through hole 512 entry blocking member 513 bottom surface 514 prize opening 516 case member 517 special passage unit 530 special start opening unit 531 prize passage 532 special prize winning device 534 inclined face 535 receiving guide member 536 protrusion 538 winning device casing 539 wall 540 Transmission mechanism 541 Outlet 542 Opening 543 Movable guide wall 545 Front case 546 Rear case 547 Flange 548 Solenoid 549 Plunger 551 Arm member 553 Game ball detection means 554 Brake gate member 557 Mounting hole 558 Intrusion prevention member 601 Normal symbol per-determining random number extraction means 602 Normal symbol win / fail judgment means 603 First hold means 604 First hold release means 605 Normal symbol display control means 606 Normal symbol hold display control means 607 Normal hit game execution means 608 Advantageous game execution means 611 Special symbol per-determination random number extraction means 612 Special symbol success / failure determination means 613 Second hold means 614 Second hold release means 615 Special symbol display control means 616 Special symbol hold display control means 617 Small hit game execution means 618 Big hit game execution means 620 Command transmission means 621 Discharge judgment means 622 Winning judgment means 623 Prize ball payout means 630 Command reception means 631 Normal symbol image display control means 632 Special symbol image display control means 758 Liquid crystal control board 758a Liquid crystal control MPU
758b LCD control ROM
758c VDP
758d Image ROM
763 Sub-integrated board 763a Sub-integrated MPU
763b Sub-integrated ROM
763c Sound source IC
763d sound ROM
765 Main control board 765a Main control MPU
765b Main control I / O port 769 RAM clear switch 775 Dispensing control board 775a Dispensing control MPU
775b Payout control I / O port 775c External WDT
777 Error LED indicator 778 Error release switch 779 Ball removal switch 780 Main board 781 Peripheral board 1150 Image display area 1150a Visible area 1150b Concealed area 1151 Lottery information display area 1152 Game information display area 1153 Hold corresponding display area 1154 Normal symbol corresponding display area 1155 Special Symbol Display Area 3431 Wall

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area;
A receiving port provided in the gaming area and capable of receiving a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area;
An opening and closing device provided in the game area, which is displaceable between a closed mode in which a game ball cannot be received and an open mode in which a game ball can be received;
At least one special region and one or more normal regions are provided at the periphery, and a rotary accessory that performs a rotational operation in the circumferential direction;
A guide device capable of supplying a game ball received from the switchgear to the rotary accessory;
Receiving port detecting means for detecting the passing or receiving of a game ball to the receiving port;
Lottery means for performing an internal lottery process based on the fact that a game ball has passed or received at the reception port by the reception port detection unit;
An opening / closing control means for displacing the opening / closing device from the closed mode to the open mode when the result of the lottery process by the lottery unit is a specific winning;
Guidance control means for controlling the operation of the guide device so that a game ball received from the opening / closing device is supplied to the rotary accessory at a specific timing;
An object lottery determination means for determining whether or not the object lottery is a mechanical lottery using the rotary type object;
And special game execution means for performing a special game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the winning selection is detected by the accessory lottery determination means,
A game control means having at least
A gaming machine equipped with
The guide device supplies the one game ball to the rotary combination by causing only one game ball out of the game balls received from the opening / closing device to face the periphery of the rotary combination. And
The normal region is formed by a normal selection port capable of receiving a game ball, and a normal peripheral wall adjacent to the normal selection port and facing the guide device prior to the normal selection port,
The special area is formed by a special selection port capable of receiving a game ball, and a special peripheral wall adjacent to the special selection port and the guide device facing the special selection port prior to the special selection port,
The accessory lottery determination means is for determining that the accessory lottery is won based on the fact that a game ball is received in the special selection port,
The special region has a thin wall so as to cover a part of the special selection port from the edge of the special selection port opposite to the rotation direction of the rotary accessory toward the rotation direction. The body is extended,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the wall body forms the normal peripheral wall for allowing the normal selection port adjacent in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotary accessory to receive a game ball.